Canon imagePROGRAF iPF6100 User Guide

L a r g e F o r m a t P r i n t e r

User Manual

Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals

ENG


Contents

Contents

Introduction

How to use th�s manual ....................................................................................1

About Th�s User Manual ..............................................................................................................1

V�ew�ng V�deos of Explanat�ons ..................................................................................................3

HTML Vers�on of the Manual for Pr�nt�ng .....................................................................................4

Printer Parts

1

8

Pr�nter parts ......................................................................................................8

Front ............................................................................................................................................8

Back ............................................................................................................................................9

Top Cover (Ins�de) .....................................................................................................................10

Tray Feed Area .......................................................................................................................... 11

Roll Paper Un�t Cover (Ins�de) ...................................................................................................12

Carr�age .....................................................................................................................................13

Ink Tank Cover (Ins�de) ..............................................................................................................14

Control Panel .............................................................................................................................15

Vents .........................................................................................................................................18

Control Panel ..................................................................................................19

Turn�ng the Pr�nter On and Off ..................................................................................................19

Pr�nter Modes ............................................................................................................................21

Sw�tch�ng Modes .......................................................................................................................26

Pr�nter Menu Operat�ons ...........................................................................................................29

Ma�n Menu Operat�ons ..............................................................................................................30

Menu Structure ..........................................................................................................................35

Ma�n Menu Sett�ngs ...................................................................................................................49

Ma�n Menu Sett�ngs (Dur�ng Pr�nt�ng) .......................................................................................59

Submenu D�splay ......................................................................................................................61

Status Pr�nt ................................................................................................................................62

Opt�onal accessor�es ......................................................................................69

Stand .........................................................................................................................................69

Roll Holder Set ..........................................................................................................................70

IEEE 1394 Expans�on Board .....................................................................................................71

Printer Specifications ......................................................................................72

Specifications ............................................................................................................................72

Bas�c Env�ronmental Performance ............................................................................................77

Pr�nt Area ...................................................................................................................................78

Contents ��


Contents

Basic Printing Workflow 80

Pr�nt�ng procedure ..........................................................................................80

Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Rolls ...................................................................................................80

Load�ng and Pr�nt�ng on Sheets �n the Paper Feed Slot ...........................................................85

Pr�nt�ng Opt�ons Us�ng Rolls and Sheets ..................................................................................87

Pr�nt�ng from W�ndows ..............................................................................................................88

Pr�nt�ng from Mac OS X .............................................................................................................89

Pr�nt�ng from Mac OS 9 .............................................................................................................91

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (W�ndows) .....................................................................93

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS X) ...................................................................95

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver (Mac OS 9) ....................................................................97

Cancel�ng pr�nt jobs ........................................................................................99

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from the Control Panel ............................................................................99

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from W�ndows ........................................................................................101

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from Mac OS X ......................................................................................103

Cancel�ng Pr�nt Jobs from Mac OS 9 ......................................................................................105

Handling Paper 107

Paper ............................................................................................................107

Paper .......................................................................................................................................107

Types of Paper ........................................................................................................................108

Paper S�zes ............................................................................................................................. 113

Handl�ng rolls ................................................................................................ 115

Select�ng the Roll as the Paper Source ................................................................................... 115

Load�ng Rolls on the Roll Paper Holder .................................................................................. 116

Remov�ng Rolls From the Roll Holder ..................................................................................... 118

Load�ng Rolls �n the Roll Feed Un�t ......................................................................................... 119

Remov�ng Rolls from the Roll Feed Un�t .................................................................................122

Select�ng the Paper Type (Roll) ...............................................................................................124

Spec�fy�ng the Paper Length (Roll) ..........................................................................................125

Feed�ng Roll Paper Manually ..................................................................................................126

Detect�on of the Rema�n�ng Roll Paper ...................................................................................127

Cutt�ng the Lead�ng Edge of Roll Paper Automat�cally ............................................................128

Spec�fy�ng the Cutt�ng Method for Rolls ..................................................................................129

Reduc�ng Dust from Cutt�ng Rolls ...........................................................................................134

Spec�fy�ng the Ink Dry�ng T�me for Rolls ..................................................................................135

Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................138

Clear�ng Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ............................................................................142

Roll Holder Set ........................................................................................................................143

Attach�ng Accessor�es to the Roll Holder ................................................................................144

Feed�ng Paper from the Roll Feed Un�t ...................................................................................146

Remov�ng the Roll Feed Un�t ..................................................................................................147

Install�ng the Roll Feed Un�t ....................................................................................................148

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from the Operat�ng System Menu (W�ndows) .........149

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................151

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS X) ....................................................................152

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................153

Contents

Handl�ng sheets for paper feed slots ............................................................154

Select�ng the Sheet as the Paper Source ...............................................................................154

Load�ng Sheets Manually ........................................................................................................156

Select�ng the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................162

Select�ng the Paper S�ze (Sheet) ............................................................................................163

Remov�ng Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot ....................................................................164

Remov�ng Heavywe�ght Paper from the Front Paper Feed Slot .............................................165

Clear�ng Jammed Paper from the Tray ...................................................................................166

Output Stacker ..............................................................................................169

Us�ng the Output Stacker ........................................................................................................169

Output Stacker Precaut�ons ....................................................................................................171

Enhanced Printing Options 172

Pr�nt qual�ty and color sett�ngs ......................................................................172

Choos�ng a Paper for Pr�nt�ng .................................................................................................172

G�v�ng Pr�or�ty to Part�cular Graph�c Elements and Colors for Pr�nt�ng ...................................173

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows, Mac OS X) ................................................................177

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................179

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows, Mac OS X)..........................................................181

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS 9)...........................................................................182

Printing Office Documents .......................................................................................................183

Adjust�ng the Color �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver ..................................................................................184

Pr�nt�ng �n Ideal Colors for L�ght �n the V�ew�ng Env�ronment ..................................................188

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome ..............................................................................................189

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (W�ndows) .........................................190

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (Mac OS X) .......................................192

Choos�ng the Document Type and Pr�nt�ng Cond�t�ons (Mac OS 9)........................................195

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (W�ndows) ............................................................198

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ..........................................................201

F�ne-Tun�ng Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) ...........................................................204

F�ne-Tun�ng Monochrome Sett�ngs When Pr�nt�ng Photos (W�ndows) ....................................207

F�ne-Tun�ng Monochrome Sett�ngs When Pr�nt�ng Photos (Mac OS X) ..................................209

F�ne-Tun�ng Monochrome Sett�ngs When Pr�nt�ng Photos (Mac OS 9) ..................................212

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows) ............................................................................215

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................217


Printing Office Documents (Windows) .....................................................................................222

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) ...................................................................................224

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS 9) ...................................................................................226

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (W�ndows) ..................................................................................228

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ................................................................................230

Pr�nt�ng Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................233

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome (W�ndows) ............................................................................236

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................238

Pr�nt�ng Photos �n Monochrome (Mac OS 9) ...........................................................................241

Contents ��


Contents

Pr�nt�ng enlargements or reduct�ons .............................................................244

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze ............................................................................244

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...................................................................................245

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value.......................................................................246

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER ............................247

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (W�ndows) ..........248

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (Mac OS X) ........250

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (W�ndows).....................................................252

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (Mac OS X) ...................................................254

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals by Enter�ng a Scal�ng Value (Mac OS 9) ...................................................257

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (W�ndows) .................................................................261

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...............................................................263

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS 9) ................................................................266

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ..........................................................269

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ........................................................271

Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS 9) .........................................................274

Pr�nt�ng at full s�ze .........................................................................................277

Pr�nt�ng on Overs�zed Paper ...................................................................................................277

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................279

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................281

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................283

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS 9) ........................................................................286

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (W�ndows) ...............................................................................................290

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (Mac OS X) ..............................................................................................292

Pr�nt�ng at Full S�ze (Mac OS 9) ..............................................................................................295

Borderless Pr�nt�ng .......................................................................................297

Borderless Pr�nt�ng on Paper of Equ�valent S�ze .....................................................................297

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth ...............................................299

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze ...........................................................................................301

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (W�ndows) .........................................................................303

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS X) .......................................................................305

Borderless Pr�nt�ng at Actual S�ze (Mac OS 9) ........................................................................308

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (W�ndows) .............................312

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS X) ...........................314

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to F�t the Roll W�dth (Mac OS 9) ...........................317

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (W�ndows) ......................321

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS X) ....................323

Borderless Pr�nt�ng by Res�z�ng Or�g�nals to Match the Paper S�ze (Mac OS 9) ....................326

Pr�nt�ng banners or at other non-standard s�zes ...........................................330

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng) .............................................330

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes ...................................................................................331

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (W�ndows) .................................................................332

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (Mac OS X) ................................................................336

Pr�nt�ng on Non-Standard Paper S�zes (Mac OS 9) ................................................................338

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; W�ndows) .............................341

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; Mac OS X) ...........................345

Pr�nt�ng Vert�cal or Hor�zontal Banners (Large-Format Pr�nt�ng; Mac OS 9) ...........................348

Contents

T�l�ng and mult�ple pages per sheet ..............................................................352

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other ........................................................................352

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously ......................................................................................354

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet ...........................................................................................355

Pr�nt�ng Posters �n Sect�ons ....................................................................................................356

Pr�nt�ng Large Posters (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................357

Pr�nt�ng Large Posters (Mac OS 9) .........................................................................................359

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (W�ndows) ......................................................361

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Or�g�nals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) ....................................................363

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (W�ndows) ....................................................................365

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (Mac OS X) ..................................................................366

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Cont�nuously (Mac OS 9) ..................................................................368

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................370

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) .......................................................................372

Pr�nt�ng Mult�ple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9) .......................................................................375

Center�ng or�g�nals ........................................................................................378

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls .......................................................................................378

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets ....................................................................................379

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (W�ndows) .....................................................................380

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ...................................................................382

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9) ....................................................................385

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (W�ndows) ..................................................................388

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) ................................................................390

Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9) .................................................................392

Conserv�ng roll paper ....................................................................................395

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees ......................................................395

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns ......................396

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (W�ndows) ....397

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (Mac OS X) ..399

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Pr�nt�ng Or�g�nals W�thout Top and Bottom Marg�ns (Mac OS 9) ...402

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (W�ndows) ....................................404

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) ...................................406

Conserv�ng Roll Paper by Rotat�ng Or�g�nals 90 Degrees (Mac OS 9) ...................................409

Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs ................................................................................. 411

Pr�nt�ng CAD Draw�ngs ............................................................................................................ 411

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (W�ndows) ............................................................................412

Pr�nt�ng L�ne Draw�ngs and Text (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................414


Other useful sett�ngs .....................................................................................419

Pr�nt�ng W�th Watermarks ........................................................................................................419

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on .................................................420

Us�ng Favor�tes .......................................................................................................................421

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng ..............................................................................................421

Pr�nt�ng from Photoshop ..........................................................................................................422

Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals ................................................................................423

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ............................................................................424

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................425

Cutt�ng Roll Paper After Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS 9) ..........................................................................427


Contents v

Contents

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (W�ndows) ...............................429

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (Mac OS X) .............................431

Mak�ng the Or�g�nal Or�entat�on Match the Paper Or�entat�on (Mac OS 9) .............................434

Pr�nt�ng w�th Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (W�ndows)......................................436

Pr�nt�ng w�th Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9) ....................................438

Software 441

W�ndows .......................................................................................................441

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................441

Confirming Print Settings (Windows) .......................................................................................443

Prev�ew�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) .......................................................................445

Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (W�ndows) ...............................................................446

Sett�ngs Summar�es D�alog Box (W�ndows) ............................................................................447

Us�ng Favor�tes (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................448

Ma�n Sheet (W�ndows) ............................................................................................................450

Page Setup Sheet (W�ndows) .................................................................................................454

Layout Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................................................456

Gray Adjustment Sheet (W�ndows) .........................................................................................458

Favor�tes Sheet (W�ndows) .....................................................................................................459

Ut�l�ty Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................................460

Support Sheet (W�ndows) .......................................................................................................461

Dev�ce Sett�ngs Sheet (W�ndows) ...........................................................................................462

Us�ng PosterArt�st to Compose Or�g�nals (W�ndows) ..............................................................463

Pr�nt�ng Adobe RGB Images (W�ndows) .................................................................................465

�magePROGRAF Status Mon�tor (W�ndows) ...........................................................................468

�magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................................469

Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................470

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................471

D�g�tal Photo Front-Access ......................................................................................................472

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (W�ndows) ...................................473

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from the Operat�ng System Menu (W�ndows) .........475

Color Sett�ngs Sheet: Color (W�ndows) ...................................................................................477

Color Sett�ngs Sheet: Monochrome (W�ndows) ......................................................................483

Confirming the Print Image Before Printing .............................................................................485

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ......................................................................486

Med�a S�ze Opt�ons D�alog Box (W�ndows) .............................................................................487

Pr�nt�ng Enlargements of Scanned Or�g�nals from a Color �mageRUNNER (W�ndows) ..........488

Spec�al Sett�ngs D�alog Box (W�ndows) ..................................................................................490

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (W�ndows)............................................491

Mac OS X .....................................................................................................492

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (Mac OS X) .........................................................................................492

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) .....................................................................................493

Check�ng the Layout Before Pr�nt�ng .......................................................................................495

Check�ng the Layout Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) ...................................................................496

Prev�ew�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS X) .....................................................................497

Paper Informat�on on Pr�nter D�alog Box (Mac OS X) .............................................................498

Ma�n Pane (Mac OS X) ...........................................................................................................499

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ................................................................................................501

Ut�l�ty Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................................................................................503

Contents

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) .........................................................................................504

Add�t�onal Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS X) .....................................................................................505

Support Pane (Mac OS X) .......................................................................................................506

Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................................506

Pr�nt�ng Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) ................................................................................507

�magePROGRAF Pr�ntmon�tor (Mac�ntosh) .............................................................................510

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (Mac OS X) ................................. 511

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Color (Mac OS X) ..................................................................................512

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) ......................................................................514

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS X) ....................................................................515

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (Mac OS X) ..........................................516

Mac OS 9 ......................................................................................................517

Pr�nter Dr�ver Sett�ngs (Mac OS 9) ..........................................................................................517

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................................518

Prev�ew�ng Images Before Pr�nt�ng (Mac OS 9) ......................................................................520

Ma�n Pane (Mac OS 9) ............................................................................................................521

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................................523

F�n�sh�ng Pane (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................................................525

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9) .........................................................................................526

Dev�ce Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS 9) ...........................................................................................527

Add�t�onal Sett�ngs Pane (Mac OS 9) ......................................................................................528

Us�ng Favor�tes (Mac OS 9) ....................................................................................................529

Pr�nt�ng Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9) ................................................................................531

�magePROGRAF Pr�ntmon�tor (Mac�ntosh) .............................................................................534

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (Mac OS 9) ..................................535

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Color (Mac OS 9) ..................................................................................537

Color Sett�ngs Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9) ......................................................................540

Med�a Deta�led Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS 9) .....................................................................542

Spec�al Sett�ngs D�alog Box (Mac OS 9) .................................................................................543

V�ew Sett�ngs D�alog Box for the Pr�nt�ng Appl�cat�on (Mac OS 9) ..........................................544

Network Setting 545

Network Sett�ng ............................................................................................545

Network Env�ronment ..............................................................................................................545

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ...............................................................................547

In�t�al�z�ng the Network Sett�ngs ..............................................................................................548

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings .................................................................549

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel ...................................................551

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands ...............................................552

Spec�fy�ng Pr�nter-Related Informat�on ....................................................................................554

Us�ng RemoteUI ......................................................................................................................555

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur .................................................556

Network Sett�ng (W�ndows) ..........................................................................557

Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings ...............................................................557

Specifying the Printer's Frame Type ........................................................................................559

Spec�fy�ng NetWare Pr�nt Serv�ces ..........................................................................................561

Spec�fy�ng NetWare Protocols .................................................................................................564

Configuring NetWare Network Settings ...................................................................................566

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows) .............................................................567


Contents v��

Contents

Shar�ng the Pr�nter �n W�ndows ...............................................................................................568

Install�ng �magePROGRAF Dev�ce Setup Ut�l�ty .....................................................................570

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ...............................571

Network Sett�ng (Mac�ntosh) .........................................................................572

Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings .............................................................572

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh) ...........................................................573

Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh) .............................................574

Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh) .................................................578

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh) ................................................582

Maintenance 584

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead .................................................................................584

Correct�ng Pr�nt M�sal�gnment .................................................................................................584

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead Al�gnment Automat�cally ....................................................................584

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead Al�gnment Manually ...........................................................................586

Adjust�ng the Pr�nthead He�ght ................................................................................................588

Adjust�ng the feed amount ............................................................................589

Adjust�ng the Feed Amount Automat�cally ...............................................................................589

Adjust�ng the Feed Amount Manually ......................................................................................592

Adjust�ng the Vacuum Strength ...............................................................................................595

Adjust�ng the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy ...........................................................596

Adjust�ng Color on the Tra�l�ng Edge of Sheets .......................................................................598

Color adjustment ...........................................................................................600

Us�ng Color Cal�brat�on to Adjust Colors .................................................................................600

Pr�nt�ng �n Ideal Colors for L�ght �n the V�ew�ng Env�ronment ..................................................603

By select�ng color tones on Charts before pr�nt�ng (W�ndows) ................................................604

Pr�nt�ng �n Colors Match�ng the Measured Amb�ent L�ght ........................................................608

Access�ng the Pr�nter Dr�ver D�alog Box from Appl�cat�ons (W�ndows) ................................... 611

Ink Tanks .......................................................................................................613

Ink Tank ...................................................................................................................................613

Replac�ng Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................614

Check�ng Ink Tank Levels ........................................................................................................620

When to Replace Ink Tanks .....................................................................................................621

Pr�ntheads .....................................................................................................622

Pr�nthead .................................................................................................................................622

Check�ng the Pr�nt Qual�ty .......................................................................................................622

Improv�ng the Pr�nt Qual�ty ......................................................................................................622

Check�ng for Nozzle Clogg�ng .................................................................................................623

Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................624

Replac�ng the Pr�nthead ..........................................................................................................625

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .................................................................................632

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge ............................................................................................................632

Replac�ng the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .....................................................................................632

Check�ng the Rema�n�ng Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge Capac�ty .....................................................637

When to Replace the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge .........................................................................638

Contents

Clean�ng the Pr�nter ......................................................................................639

Clean�ng the Pr�nter Exter�or ...................................................................................................639

Clean�ng Ins�de the Top Cover ................................................................................................640

Clean�ng the Paper Reta�ner ...................................................................................................643

Clean�ng Spurs Used �n Paper Feed�ng ..................................................................................644

Clean�ng the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................................647

Other Ma�ntenance .......................................................................................648

Prepar�ng to Transfer the Pr�nter .............................................................................................648

Updat�ng the F�rmware ............................................................................................................652

Troubleshooting 653

Frequently Asked Quest�ons .........................................................................653

Frequently Asked Quest�ons ...................................................................................................653

Spec�fy�ng Paper �n the Pr�nter Dr�ver .....................................................................................655

Pr�nt�ng does not start ...................................................................................656

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not l�ght up ............................................................656

The Pr�nter Does Not Respond Even �f Pr�nt Jobs are Sent ....................................................656

The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink ......................................................656

Cannot pr�nt over a network ..........................................................................657

Cannot connect the pr�nter to the network ..............................................................................657

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually .....................................................................658

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network ........................................................................................659

Cannot pr�nt over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ...................................................................660

Cannot pr�nt over a NetWare network .....................................................................................661

The pr�nter stops dur�ng a pr�nt job ...............................................................662

An error message �s shown on the D�splay Screen .................................................................662

The pr�nter ejects blank, unpr�nted paper ................................................................................662

Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty .................................................................663

Pr�nt�ng �s fa�nt .........................................................................................................................663

Paper rubs aga�nst the Pr�nthead ............................................................................................664

The edges of the paper are d�rty .............................................................................................665

The surface of the paper �s d�rty ..............................................................................................666

The back s�de of the paper �s d�rty ..........................................................................................666

Band�ng �n d�fferent colors occurs ...........................................................................................666

The contrast becomes uneven dur�ng pr�nt�ng ........................................................................667

Colors �n pr�nted �mages are uneven .......................................................................................667

Problems w�th the pr�nt�ng qual�ty caused by the type of paper ..............................................668

L�nes are m�sal�gned ...............................................................................................................668

The length of pr�nted �mages �s �naccurate ..............................................................................668

Documents are pr�nted �n monochrome ..................................................................................668

Pr�nted colors are �naccurate ...................................................................................................669

Image Edges are Blurred or Wh�te Band�ng Occurs ...............................................................670

Documents are pr�nted crooked ..............................................................................................670

Wh�te dots about 1 mm (0.039 �n) apart appear on pr�nted documents, �n the d�rect�on paper �s fed. .............................................................................................................................670

Contents �x


Contents

Immed�ately After Borderless Pr�nt�ng, the Tra�l�ng Edge Marg�n �s So�led Dur�ng Regular

Pr�nt�ng ....................................................................................................................................670

Roller marks are left across the tra�l�ng edge of paper ............................................................671

L�ne th�ckness �s not un�form (W�ndows) .................................................................................671

Installat�on problems .....................................................................................672

The IEEE 1394 Dr�ver Cannot Be Installed Correctly ..............................................................672

Remov�ng Installed Pr�nter Dr�vers ..........................................................................................673

Clear�ng jammed paper ................................................................................674

Clear�ng Jammed Roll Paper ..................................................................................................674

Clear�ng Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ............................................................................678

Clear�ng Jammed Paper from the Tray ...................................................................................679

If the Pr�nter makes a strange sound ............................................................682

If the Pr�nter Makes a Strange Sound .....................................................................................682

Other problems .............................................................................................683

The pr�nter consumes a lot of �nk ............................................................................................683

A message to check the Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge �s not cleared after you replace the

Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge ............................................................................................................683

Paper �s not cut stra�ght ...........................................................................................................683

Paper cannot be cut ................................................................................................................683

Depress�on on the lead�ng edge �s left ....................................................................................684

Roller marks are left across the tra�l�ng edge of paper ............................................................684

The pr�nter does not go on ......................................................................................................684

Roll paper cannot be �nserted �nto the Paper Feed Slot ..........................................................684

Cannot Load Sheets ................................................................................................................684

Ink level detect�on ....................................................................................................................685

Error Message 687

Respond�ng to Messages .............................................................................687

Respond�ng to Error Messages ...............................................................................................687

Error Messages .......................................................................................................................689

Messages regard�ng paper ...........................................................................691

Paper M�smatch ......................................................................................................................691

Papr Type M�smatch ................................................................................................................691

Papr S�ze M�smatch ................................................................................................................692

Th�s paper cannot be used. .....................................................................................................692

Insufficient paper for job ..........................................................................................................693

Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected, but sheets are loaded. ......................................................................694

Roll pr�nt�ng �s selected. ..........................................................................................................694

Sheet pr�nt�ng �s selected. .......................................................................................................694

Wrong paper feed slot for th�s paper type. ..............................................................................695

Manual pr�nt�ng �s selected, but a roll �s loaded. ......................................................................695

Cannot feed paper. ..................................................................................................................695

Borderless pr�ntng not poss�ble. ..............................................................................................696

Paper loaded askew. ...............................................................................................................697

Paper s�ze not detected. ..........................................................................................................697

Cannot detect papr ..................................................................................................................698

Contents

End of paper feed. ...................................................................................................................698

Cannot feed paper. ..................................................................................................................698

Paper jam. ...............................................................................................................................699

Cannot cut paper. ....................................................................................................................699

The roll �s empty. .....................................................................................................................700

Roll feed un�t err ......................................................................................................................700

No Roll Feed Un�t. ...................................................................................................................700

Messages regard�ng �nk ................................................................................701

Ink Level: Check ......................................................................................................................701

No �nk tank loaded. ..................................................................................................................701

Ink insufficient. .........................................................................................................................702

Ink tank �s empty. .....................................................................................................................703

Ink tank error. ..........................................................................................................................703

Rema�n�ng level of the �nk cannot be correctly detected. ........................................................703

Messages regard�ng pr�nt�ng or adjusment ...................................................704

Use another paper. ..................................................................................................................704

Cannot execute th�s command. Use other paper. ...................................................................704

Cannot print as specified. ........................................................................................................704

Cannot adjust band. ................................................................................................................704

Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................705

Excess�ve temperature or hum�d�ty..........................................................................................705

Cannot cal�brate. .....................................................................................................................705

Messages regard�ng pr�ntheads ...................................................................706

Cannot adjust pr�nthead. .........................................................................................................706

Cannot adjust band. ................................................................................................................706

x pr�nthead needs clean�ng. (x �s Left or R�ght) .......................................................................706

PHeads: wrong pos. ................................................................................................................706

Problem w�th Pr�nthead x (x �s L, R, or LR) .............................................................................707

x pr�nthead error (x �s Left or R�ght) .........................................................................................707

Messages regard�ng the ma�ntenance cartr�dge ..........................................708

No ma�ntenance cartr�dge. ......................................................................................................708

Prepare for ma�nt cart replacement. ........................................................................................708

No Ma�ntenance Cartr�dge capac�ty.........................................................................................708

Ma�ntenance cartr�dge full. ......................................................................................................708

Ma�ntenance cartr�dge problem. ..............................................................................................708

Other Messages ...........................................................................................709

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ...................................................................................709

Top cover �s open. ...................................................................................................................709

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ..............................................................709

Unknown file. ...........................................................................................................................709

Prepare for parts replacement. ................................................................................................709

Parts replacement t�me has passed. .......................................................................................709

Mult�-sensor error ....................................................................................................................710

Roll feed un�t err ......................................................................................................................710

No Roll Feed Un�t. ...................................................................................................................710

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) ...........................................710


Contents x�

Contents

How to use this manual

Introduction

How to use this manual

About This User Manual

•

Symbols

The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations on restrictions or precautions in use.

Important Indicates important information that must be followed when using the printer. Be sure to read this information to prevent printer damage or operating errors.

Caution

Note

Indicates caution items for which operating error poses a risk of injury or damage to equipment or property. To ensure safe use, always follow these precautions.

Indicates helpful reference information and supplemental information on particular topics.

•

Button names and user interface elements

Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Control Panel Buttons Example: Press the OK button.

Control Panel Interface Items and Messages Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.

Example: Click OK .

Software Interface Items

(Menus and Buttons)

Keyboard Keys Example: Press the Tab key.

•

Part Names

Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Printer part names Example: Open the Top Cover .

Introduction 1



•

Cross-reference

Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Cross-Reference in the Same User Manual Example: see “Turning the Printer On and Off”.

(→P.19)

Click the link to jump to the corresponding page.

Cross-Reference in Related Manuals

Other Cross-Reference

Example: See the Paper Reference Guide .

Example: See the printer driver help.

•

Figures and software screens

•

Figures in this User Manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some cases.

•

Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from the actual screens because of subsequent updates.

•

Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.

•

Trademarks

•

Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon

Inc.

•

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

•

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.

•

Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

•

Copyright

© 2007 Canon Inc.

•

Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.

•

May we request

Thank you for understanding the following points.

•

The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.

•

We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or omissions, please contact us.

2 Introduction



Viewing Videos of Explanations

To view videos related to topic pages, click the View Video button. The video will play in a separate window.

This way, you can learn by watching demonstrations of the actual procedures.

Video Requirements: In Windows, Adobe Flash Player must be installed to view the videos.

If it is not installed, download it by clicking the following URL.

http://www.adobe.com/products/ashplayer/

Note that this URL is subject to change. If you cannot access this URL, download Adobe Flash Player by visiting the main Adobe website and navigating to the appropriate page.


Introduction 3


HTML Version of the Manual for Printing

For your convenience when printing this manual, HTML versions of the sections in “Using the Printer” on the top page are available. All topics in a section are combined in one le for printing. This section describes how to print sections of the manual, using the content of Printing Procedure in Basic Printing Workow as an example.

1.

On the top page, click Basic Printing Workow.

2.

Under Basic Printing Workow in the left frame, click Printing Procedure.

4 Introduction



3.

In the title area of Printing Procedure, click Access to the HTML for printing.

An HTML version of the topics in Printing Procedure is displayed, suitable for printing.


Introduction 5


4.

Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer’s operating system.

•

Windows

In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link. In the shortcut menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.

•

Macintosh

On a Macintosh computer, click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link while holding the Ctrl key. In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.

6 Introduction



5.

Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).

•

Windows

•

Macintosh

Note

•

To print “Software” on the top page or individual topics that are displayed, follow steps 4 and 5.


Introduction 7

Printer parts

Printer Parts

Printer parts

Front

Standard When the Ejection Guide is removed

a. Top Cover

Open this cover to install the Printhead and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer, as needed. (→P.10) b. Paper Tray Cover

Open this cover to load sheets in the Top Paper Feed Slot. (→P.11) c. Roll Feed Unit

Load rolls in this unit. You can also load sheets in this unit manually.

d. Roll Paper Unit Cover

Open this cover to load rolls. (→P.12) e. Control Panel

Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (→P.15) f. Ejection Guide

Supports paper as it is ejected to prevent it from rising.

g. Output Tray ( Front Paper Feed Slot )

All printed documents are ejected to the output tray. Also, use this slot when loading heavyweight paper. (→P.11) h. Cutter Unit

A round-bladed cutter for automatic cutting of roll paper. The cutter is retracted inside when not cutting.

i. Maintenance Cartridge

Absorbs excess ink.

j. Ink Tank Cover

Open this cover to replace Ink Tank. (→P.14)

8 Printer Parts


Printer parts k. Stand

A stand on which the printer is installed. Equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved.

l. Output Stacker

Printed documents are ejected into the output tray. The Output Stacker (→P.171) can hold one sheet.

Back

a. Expansion Board Slots

For installing an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board, as desired.

b. USB Port

Connect a USB cable to this port. This port is compatible with High Speed USB 2.0.

c. Ethernet Port

Connect an Ethernet cable to this port.

d. Power Supply Connector

Connect the power cord to this connector.

e. Carrying handles (at six positions)

When carrying the printer, hold it by these handles under both sides.


Printer Parts 9

Printer parts

Top Cover (Inside)

a. Carriage

Moves the Printhead. It serves a key role in printing. (→P.13) b. Carriage Shaft

The Carriage slides along this shaft.

c. Paper Retainer

Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.

d. Platen

The Printhead moves across the platen during printing. Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.

e. Borderless Printing Ink Grooves

For catching ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.

f. Cleaning Brush

When cleaning inside the printer under the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.

g. Linear Scale

The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams.

10 Printer Parts


Printer parts

Tray Feed Area

a. Tray Extension

When loading sheets on the tray, open the Paper Tray Cover before opening the tray.

b. Width Guide

When loading the sheets , move the guide to match the paper size.

c. Top Paper Feed Slot

When loading sheets, insert them here.

d. Front Paper Feed Slot ( Output Tray )

When loading heavyweight paper, insert it here. Also, all printed documents are ejected from this slot.

e. Front Tray Guides

Lift all of the guides before printing on heavyweight paper. When feeding heavyweight paper, rest the sheet on these guides, align it to the right, and insert the leading edge up to the Paper

Alignment Line.

f. Paper Alignment Line

When loading heavyweight paper, ensure the paper edge is parallel to this line.


Printer Parts 11

Printer parts

Roll Paper Unit Cover (Inside)

a. Roll Holder

Load rolls on this holder.

b. Holder Stopper

Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part.

c. Roll Holder Slot

Slide the Roll Holder into this guide slot.

12 Printer Parts


Carriage

a. Printhead Fixer Cover

Holds the Printhead in place. Do not open this part except during Printhead replacement.

b. Printhead

The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. It serves a key role in printing.

c. Printhead Fixer Lever

Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover. Do not open this part except during Printhead replacement.

Printer parts


Printer Parts 13

Printer parts

Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

a. Ink Tank

Cartridges of ink in various colors.

b. Ink Tank Lock Lever

A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Open or close the lever when replacing an

Ink Tank.

c. Ink Lamp (Red)

Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.

•

On

On: The Ink Tank is installed correctly.

•

Off

Off: No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is disabled.

•

Flashing Slowly

Not much ink is left.

•

Flashing Rapidly

There is no ink left.

a. Ink Color Label

Load an Ink Tank corresponding to the color and name on these labels.

b. Ink Set

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer (→P.613) is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the side. When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “H” is printed on the label.

14 Printer Parts


Printer parts

Control Panel

a. Data lamp (Green)

•

Flashing

During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.

Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the printer is paused or updating the rmware.

•

Off

There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.

b. Message lamp (Orange)

•

On

A warning message is displayed.

•

Flashing

An error message is displayed.

•

Off

The printer is off or is operating normally.

c. Paper Source Section

After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.

1.

Roll Media lamp (Green) (Rolls)

•

On

Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.

•

Off

Shows whether the Tray or Front Paper Feed Slot is selected as the paper source.

2.

Cut Sheet lamp (Green)

•

On

Shows whether the Tray or Front Paper Feed Slot is selected as the paper source.

•

Off

Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.

d. Display Screen

Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.

e. Color Label

These labels indicate the Ink Tank colors and names. The labels correspond to the ink levels on the Display Screen.

Printer Parts 15


Printer parts f. Online Button

Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.26)

•

On (Green)

The printer is online.

•

Flashing

The printer is recovering from Sleep mode.

•

Off

The printer is ofine.

g. Feeder Selection Button

Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between roll feed (when the paper source is a roll) and sheet feed (when the paper source is the Tray or Front

Paper Feed Slot ). The corresponding lamp in the paper source section is lit.

h. Menu Button

Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.49) i. Information Button

Displays printer submenus. Press this key to display information about ink, paper, and so on.

(→P.61)

You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A ).

j. ◄ Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.

When you are entering numbers, the button moves the cursor to the next digit.

The instructions can be paused when [← Pause] is displayed.

When [← Back] is displayed, you can access the previous instruction screen.

k. ▲ Button

Ofine mode: Press this button to rewind rolls manually. (→P.126)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.

l. ► Button

Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.

When [Fwd →] is displayed, you can access the next instruction screen.

m.▼ Button

Ofine mode: Press this button to feed roll paper manually. (→P.126)

Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.

n. OK Button

In menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting.

At other times, pressing this button enables you to access the next screen after following the instructions on the Display Screen.

o. Power Button

Turns the printer on and off. (→P.19) p. Load/Eject Button

You can check instructions on loading, replacing, and removing paper. Instructions for loading or replacing paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and instructions for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.

16 Printer Parts


Printer parts q. Stop Button

Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.

During display of instructions on loading sheets, for example, you can hold down this button for one second to pause the current screen.

Note

•

When the printer is in Sleep mode, you can press any button to wake the printer and bring it online or ofine again.


Printer Parts 17

Printer parts

Vents

The vents are on top (1), on the right (2), and on the bottom on the right (3 and 4).

Caution

•

Do not block these vents when the printer is on.

•

Avoid setting paper or other light objects near the vents.

18 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Turning the Printer On and Off

Turning the printer on

1.

Press the Power button to turn on the printer.

The printer will now start up.

After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait. is displayed.

Control Panel

2.

The printer goes online in preparation for printing after startup, and the Online lamp and paper source section lamp remain lit.

The printer will not go online in the following situations. Take action as needed.

•

The Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover.

•

The Ink Tank Cover is open

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

•

The Printhead is not installed

Please see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.625)

•

Ink Tank is not installed

Please see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.614)

•

“ERROR” is shown on the Display Screen

Turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer.

•

The Online lamp and Message lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display

Screen

Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.

Printer Parts 19


Control Panel

•

No paper is loaded

Load paper. (→P.80) (→P.85)

Important

•

Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may cause the computer to start up at the same time. To prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before starting the printer. Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.

Turning the printer off

Important

•

Never turn the printer off or unplug it during a print job. This could damage the printer.

1.

Make sure no print jobs are in progress.

If the Message lamp is ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.689)

If the Data lamp is ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after printing is nished.

2.

Hold down the Power button for more than a second.

After Shut Down.. Please Wait.. is shown on the Display Screen, the printer shuts off.

20 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Printer Modes

Printer modes are classied as follows and described in this topic.

•

Modes (→P.21)

•

Mode transition (→P.22)

•

Online, and state of the Control Panel (→P.23)

•

Ofine, and state of the Control Panel (→P.24)

•

Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.25)

•

Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.25)

Modes

The printer has ve modes as follows:

•

Online

The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are processed immediately. If jobs are received in other modes, they are printed the next time the printer goes online.

•

Ofine

Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being processed.

While the printer is ofine, you can feed or cut roll paper manually.

The printer goes ofine automatically if jobs cannot be processed, such as if errors occur.

•

Menu mode

Menus are displayed on the printer, and you can select, set, or execute menu items. Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed.

•

Submenus

Submenus are displayed regarding ink and paper information. Jobs can be received and printing is possible while submenus are displayed and the printer is online. In other modes, any jobs sent from the computer are held without being printed while submenus are displayed.

•

Sleep mode

The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.

You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu. (→P.49)

If any print jobs are received when the printer is in Sleep mode (after it was originally online), the printer goes online and prints the jobs.

Printer Parts 21


Control Panel

Mode transition

The printer mode transitions are as follows:

*1: When submenus are displayed, you can press any button other than the Information button to return to the previous mode.

*2: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.

However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.

*3: In Sleep mode, the printer can be restored to the previous state by pressing any button. Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.

*4: The menu of options available during printing can be displayed by pressing the Online button to pause printing and then pressing the Menu button.

22 Printer Parts


Online, and state of the Control Panel

Not printing

Printing in progress (receiving or processing print jobs)

Control Panel

Display Screen

•

Top Level of the Display Screen

The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right corner.

Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.689)

•

Middle Level of the Display Screen

The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.

•

Bottom Level of the Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.620)

Control Panel

•

Online lamp (→P.15)

Lit when the printer is online.

•

Data lamp (→P.15)

Flashes when print jobs are being received or processed.

•

Message lamp (→P.15)

Lit when warning messages are displayed.


Printer Parts 23

Control Panel

Ofine, and state of the Control Panel

Ofine

Not printing Printing is paused

Display Screen

•

Display Screen

The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right corner.

Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.689)

•

Middle Level of the Display Screen

The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.

•

Bottom Level of the Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.620)

Control Panel

•


Lit when warning messages are displayed.

Error Messages

If action can be taken If no action can be taken

•

Top and Middle Levels of the Display Screen

Error messages are displayed.

•

Bottom Level of the

Display Screen

Here, the remaining ink level is indicated.

(→P.620)

•


Error messages are displayed.

•

Bottom Level of the

Display Screen

The corrective actions are displayed here.

•


The error message is displayed with the following instructions:

Turn off printer, wait, then turn on again.

•

Display Screen

“ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for

service.

•


Flashes when print jobs are being received.

•


Flashes when error messages are displayed.

Take action as needed. (→P.689)

•


Flashes when print jobs are being received.

•


Flashes when error messages are displayed.

Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power.

If the message is still displayed after this, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact the Canon dealer for assistance.

24 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel

Main menu

Menu items and settings Main menu (during printing)

•

Display Screen

Pressing the Menu button when printing is not in progress displays the main menu.

The title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and items in this menu are displayed on the second and subsequent lines. If a scroll bar is shown at right, the menu is continued below but cannot be displayed all at once. (→P.30)

•

Display Screen

The title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line, and menu items or settings are displayed on the second and subsequent lines. (→P.30)

The menu of options available during printing (top gure) can be displayed by pressing the ► button when the main menu is displayed (left gure).

•

Display Screen

The menu of options that are available during printing can be displayed while you are printing by pressing the Online button to pause printing and then pressing the Menu button.

When you select a menu, the title of the selected menu is displayed on the rst line and items in the menu are displayed on the second and subsequent lines. If a scroll bar is shown at right, the menu is continued below but cannot be displayed all at once. (→P.30)

Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel

Remaining Maintenance

Cartridge capacity and ink levels

Information of the loaded paper

Printer information

Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, and printer information. (→P.61)

Printer Parts 25


Control Panel

Switching Modes

Switching the Printer Online/Ofine

Press the Online button to switch the printer online or ofine.

The Online lamp is lit in Online mode. Printing is possible in this mode.

The Online lamp is off in Ofine mode.

26 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Depending on the status, the printer switches online and ofine as follows.

Printer Status When the Online Button is Pressed

Online The printer switches ofine and the Online lamp goes off.

Online, printing

Ofine

Ofine, when an error message is displayed

Menu mode

Menu mode, printing

Switches ofine and printing is paused.

When printing is paused, the Printing menu is available.

Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.

In the case of error messages other than those shown below or if paper is not loaded, the printer remains ofine until you solve the problem. The

Online lamp remains off.

If the following error messages are displayed, the printer switches online and printing is resumed.

However, you may not be able to obtain the desired printing results.

•

Insufcient paper for job

•

PHead needs cleaning.

•

Papr Size Mismatch

•

Papr Type Mismatch



Printing is resumed.


Printer Parts 27

Control Panel

Switching to Menu Mode

Press the Menu button to display the main menu.

Depending on the status, the printer switches to Menu mode as follows.

Printer Status When the Menu Button is Pressed

Online Switches to Menu mode.

Online, printing

Ofine

The printer stays online. It does not switch to Menu mode.

Switches to Menu mode.

Ofine, printing

Ofine, when an error message is displayed

Menus available during printing are displayed.

Not switch to Menu mode until the problem is solved.

Press the Information button to display the submenus.

Press the Information button to display the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, as well as information on the loaded paper and the printer. Press the Information button repeatedly to change the information displayed. (→P.61)

Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.

After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ten seconds if no print job is received or if you do not operate the printer.

Note

•

You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.

(→P.624)

28 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Printer Menu Operations

For instructions on selecting menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)

For details on menu levels and menu items, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.35)

The printer menu structure is made up of a main menu and submenus.

Access the main menu by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel. The principal settings available in the main menu are as follows:

•

Paper Settings

Specify the type and size of paper.

•

Print Settings

Adjust or clean the Printhead, or adjust the paper feed amount.

•

Printer Settings

Congure the network settings, set the sleep timer, and specify the unit of measurement on the display.

Note

•

By default, main menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the printer driver, the values specied in the printer driver take priority.

Access the submenu by pressing the Information button on the Control Panel. You can check the following information in submenus.

•

Ink levels

•

Maintenance Cartridge capacity

•

Size and type of paper that is selected

•

Amount of roll paper left


Printer Parts 29

Control Panel

Main Menu Operations

Press the Menu button to display the main menu. For details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

•

Main menu when no print job is in progress

•

Main menu during printing

Note

•

The main menu will not be displayed in the following cases even if you press the Menu button.

•

An error message is displayed

You can access the Menu mode after you have solved the problem.

•

Pressing the Menu button when printing is paused (because you have pressed the Online button) displays main menu items that are available during printing.

To access each function menu from the main menu, and set or execute menu items, use buttons on the

Control Panel.

The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual.

•

Accessing Menus (→P.31)

•

Specifying menu items (→P.32)

•

Specifying numerical values (→P.33)

•

Executing menu commands (→P.34)

30 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Accessing Menus

Printer menus are grouped by function.

Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. Use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.

•

Press ▲ to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press ▼ to access a lower one. If items of the menu list are more than the lines of the screen, press ▲ and ▼ to scroll the menu. If you navigate to the lowest-level menu and press the ▼ button again, the display switches to the top-level menu screen. If you navigate to the top-level menu and press the ▲ button again, the display switches to the lowest-level menu screen. Items you select are highlighted.

The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.

•

To access these lower level menus, select a menu and press ►.

•

To return to upper level menus, press the ◄ button.


Printer Parts 31

Control Panel

Specifying menu items

Follow the steps below to specify menu items.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.

Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.

The check box at left is selected, and the setting is conrmed.

After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.

3.

Press the Online button to bring the printer online.

Note

•

If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer goes online.

32 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Specifying numerical values

Follow the steps below to enter numbers for items such as network settings.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

•

Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your network.

7.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to continue entering numbers.

8.


Note

•

If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer goes online.


Printer Parts 33

Control Panel

Executing menu commands

Follow the steps below to execute menu commands.

1.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.

Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.

After two seconds, the menu command is executed. After commands are executed, the printer commonly reverts to the state before the menu operation, either online or ofine.

34 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Menu Structure

Main Menu

The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk “*” are the defaults.

For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)

For details on menu items, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level

Paper Cutting (*1) No *

Yes

Rep. Ink Tank

Head Cleaning

No *

Yes

Head Cleaning A

Head Cleaning B

Media Menu Manual PaperType

Plain Paper (*5)

Plain Paper HQ

(*5)

Plain Paper HG

(*5)

Recycled Coated

(*5)

High Resolution

(*5)

Coated Paper (*5)

HW Coated (*5)

Ex HW Coated (*5)

Premium MatteP

(*5)

Matte Photo (*5)

Glossy Photo (*5)

Semi-Gl Photo (*5)

HW GlossyPhoto2

(*5)

HW SemiGlPhoto2

(*5)

Poster Semi-Gl

(*5)

SatinPhoto 190

(*5)

Photo PaperPlus

(*5)

Printer Parts 35


Control Panel

First Level Second Level Third Level

PhotoPlusSemiGl

(*5)

Syn. Paper (*5)

Adh. Syn. Paper

(*5)

Backlit Film (*5)

Backprint Film (*5)

Flame-Res.Cloth

(*5)

ThinFab.Banner2

(*5)

Proong Paper

(*5)

News Proof 1 (*5)


FineArt Photo (*5)

FneArt HW Photo

(*5)

FineArt Txtr (*5)

FineArt Wtrclr (*5)

FineArtBlockP (*5)

Canvas Matte2

(*5)

JPN Paper Washi

(*5)

Colored Coated

(*5)

CAD Trace Paper

(*5)

CAD Matte Film

(*5)

POP Board (*5)

Special # Here, the number is 1-10 (*5)

Manual PaperSize ISO A1

ISO A2+

ISO A2

ISO A3+

ISO A3

Fourth Level

36 Printer Parts


Fifth Level

First Level

Roll Media Type

(*1)

Second Level Third Level

ISO A4

ISO B2

ISO B3

ISO B4

JIS B2

JIS B3

JIS B4

22"x34"(ANSI D)

17"x22"(ANSI C)

11"x17" (Ledger)

13"x19" (Super B)

Letter (8.5"x11")

Legal (8.5"x14")

20"x24"

18"x22"

14"x17"

12"x16"

10"x12"

10"x15"

8"x10"

24"x36" (ARCH D)

18"x24" (ARCH C)

12"x18" (ARCH B)

9"x12" (ARCH A)

DIN C2

DIN C3

DIN C4

16"x20"

20"x30"

13"x22"

300x900mm

Free Size Setng

Plain Paper (*5)

Plain Paper HQ

(*5)

Fourth Level


Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 37

Control Panel

First Level Second Level Third Level

Plain Paper HG

(*5)

Recycled Coated

(*5)

Coated Paper (*5)

HW Coated (*5)

Ex HW Coated (*5)

Premium MatteP

(*5)

Glossy Photo (*5)

Semi-Gl Photo (*5)

HW GlossyPhoto2

(*5)

HW SemiGlPhoto2

(*5)

Poster Semi-Gl

(*5)

SatinPhoto 190

(*5)

Syn. Paper (*5)

Adh. Syn. Paper

(*5)

Backlit Film (*5)

Backprint Film (*5)

Flame-Res.Cloth

(*5)

ThinFab.Banner2

(*5)

Proong Paper

(*5)



FineArt Photo (*5)

FneArt HW Photo

(*5)

FineArt Txtr (*5)

FineArt Wtrclr (*5)

FineArtBlockP (*5)

Canvas Matte2

(*5)

Fourth Level

38 Printer Parts


Fifth Level

First Level

Paper Details

Second Level Third Level

JPN Paper Washi

(*5)

Colored Coated

(*5)

CAD Trace Paper

(*5)

CAD Matte Film

(*5)

Special # Here, the number is 1-10 (*5)

Chk Remain.Roll

Off *

On

Fourth Level

Roll Length Set (*1,

*2)

### m (*11)

### feet (*11)

(The paper type is displayed here.) (*5)

Roll DryingTime Off

30 sec.

1 min.

3 min.

5 min.

10 min.

30 min.

60 min.

Scan Wait Time

Feed Priority

Adjust Length

Head Height

Off

1 sec.

3 sec.

5 sec.

7 sec.

9 sec.

Automatic *

Band Joint

Print Length

From -0.70% to

0.70%

Automatic *

Highest

High


Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 39

Control Panel

First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level

Standard

Low

Lowest

Skew Check Lv.

High Accuracy

Standard *

Loose

VacuumStrngth

Off

Automatic *

Strongest

Strong

Standard

Weak

Weakest

NearEnd RollMrgn 3mm

20mm

Cut Speed Fast

Standard

Trim Edge First

Slow

Automatic

Off

Cutting Mode

On

Automatic

Eject

Manual

Bordless Margin Automatic

Fixed

CutDustReduct.

On

Off

NearEnd Sht Mrgn 3mm

20mm

Manual Feed

Return Defaults

(*12)

Front

Top

No

Yes

40 Printer Parts


Fifth Level

First Level

Adjust Printer

Interface Setup

Second Level

Auto Head Adj.

Third Level

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Print

No

Fourth Level

Yes

No

Yes

Off

On *

Manual Head Adj

(*9)

No

Auto Band Adj.

Yes

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Manual Band Adj No

Yes

Adj Far Ed Feed No

Yes

Adjust Length (*3)

No

Yes

Calibration Auto Adjust

Calibration Log

Use Adj. Value

Return Defaults

No

Yes

Date

Paper Type

Disabled

Enabled *

No

Yes *

EOP Timer 10 sec.

30 sec.

1 min.

2 min.

5 min.

10 min. *

30 min.

60 min.

No

Yes

No

Yes

Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 41


Control Panel

First Level Second Level

TCP/IP

NetWare

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

Third Level

IP Mode

Protocol (*4)

IP Setting (*10)

NetWare

Frame Type (*6)

On

Off *

Auto Detect

Ethernet 2

Ethernet 802.2 *

Ethernet 802.3

Ethernet SNAP

Print Service (*6)

BinderyPServer

RPrinter

NDSPServer *

NPrinter

On

Off *

Auto Detect

On *

Off

Comm.Mode (*7) Half Duplex *

Full Duplex

Ethernet Type (*7) 10 Base-T *

100 Base-TX

Spanning Tree

Not Use *

MAC Address

Use

000085 XXXXXX

Fourth Level

Automatic

Manual *

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default G/W

Fifth Level

On

Off *

On

Off *

On

Off *

0.0.0.0 -

255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 -

255.255.255.255

0.0.0.0 -

255.255.255.255

42 Printer Parts


First Level

Maintenance

System Setup

Second Level

Ext. Interface

Return Defaults

Repl. maint cart

Third Level

No

IEEE1394

No

Yes

No

Yes

Printhead L

Fourth Level

Replace P.head

Printhead R

No

Yes

No

Yes

Move Printer

Clean Platen

Spur Cleaning

Warning

No *

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Buzzer Off

On *

Detect Mismatch Pause

Warning

None *

Keep Media Size

Off *

On

Paper Size Basis Sht Selection

ISO A3+ *

Roll Selection 1


13"x19"(Super B)

ISO A3 (297mm) *

300mm Roll

10in. (254mm) *

JIS B4 (257mm)

TrimEdge Reload Automatic

Off *

On

Noz. Check Freq.

Off

1 page

10 pages

Control Panel

Fifth Level

Printer Parts 43


Control Panel


Sleep Timer

Length Unit

Time Zone

Third Level

Automatic *

5 min. *

10 min.

15 min.

20 min.

30 min.

40 min.

50 min.

60 min.

240 min.

meter *

feet/inch

0:London (GMT)

+1:Paris,Rome

+2:Athens,Cairo

+3:Moscow

+4:Eerevan,Baku

+5:Islamabad

+6:Dacca

+7:Bangkok

+8:Hong Kong

+9:Tokyo,Seoul

+10:Canberra

+11NewCaledonia

+12:Wellington

-12:Eniwetok

-11:Midway is.

-10Hawaii(AHST)

-9:Alaska(AKST)

-8:Oregon (PST)

-7:Arizona(MST)

-6:Texas (CST)

-5:NewYork(EST)

-4:Santiago

-3:Buenos Aires

Fourth Level

44 Printer Parts


Fifth Level


Date Format

Date & Time

Third Level

-2:

-1:Cape Verde

yyyy/mm/dd *

dd/mm/yyyy mm/dd/yyyy

Date

Time

Language

Fourth Level

yyyy/mm/dd (*8)

hh:mm

Control Panel

Fifth Level

Test Print

Contrast Adj.

-4, -3, -2, -1, 0*, +1,

+2, +3, +4

Reset PaprSetngs No

Status Print

Yes

No

Yes

Media Details

Print Job Log

Menu Map

Nozzle Check

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No


Printer Parts 45

Control Panel


Yes

Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level

Information System Info

Error Log

Job Log

######## - ####

(Choose from information about the latest three print jobs.)

Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status

Print Start Time

Print End Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink Consumed

*1: Available only if a roll is loaded.

*2: Available only if Chk Remain.Roll is On.

*3: Available if Feed Priority is Automatic or Print Length.

*4: Not displayed if IP Mode is Manual.

*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.108) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control

Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide

(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

*6: Not displayed if NetWare is Off.

*7: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On.

*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.

*9: Available after you have used Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. once.

*10: Not displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.

*11: Follows the setting in Length Unit.

*12: Select Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default values. Any paper type settings you have changed on the Control Panel of the printer are restored to the original values when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information by using the

Media Conguration Tool.

Caution

•

Only the following menus are displayed during printing.

•

Menu Durng Prtng

If you press the Online button while printing to pause printing and then press the Menu button,

Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj., and Information are displayed.

46 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Submenus

Each time you press the Information button on the Control Panel, printer information is displayed in the following order.

■The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels

■Information on the loaded paper

■Printer information

For details on submenu screens, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.61)


Printer Parts 47

Control Panel

Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.


For details on menu items available during printing, see “Main Menu Settings (During Printing)”. (→P.59)


Menu Durng Prtng Head Cleaning

Third Level

Head Cleaning A

Fourth Level Fifth Level

Head Cleaning B

Fine Band Adj.

Information

From -5 to 5

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

######## - ####


Document Name

User Name

Page Count

Job Status


Print End Time

Print Time

Print Size

Media Type

Interface

Ink Consumed

48 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.


For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.35)

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Paper Cutting

This command is available only if a roll is loaded.

Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. If the roll is not already at the cut position, the roll will be automatically advanced to that position and then cut.

Rep. Ink Tank

Head Cleaning

Media Menu

When replacing the Ink Tank , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.

(→P.614)

Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.624)

Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A.

Specify the type and size of paper. (→P.50)

Paper Details

Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and borderless printing options. (→P.51)

Adjust Printer

Interface Setup

Maintenance

System Setup

Test Print

Information

Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern. (→P.53)

Congure the EOP timer and network settings. (→P.54)

Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to move the printer. (→P.55)

Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display language.

(→P.56)

Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.

Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specied in Paper Details.

Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and size, amount of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is general, not specic in nature.)

Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.

Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.

Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs. (→P.58)

Printer Parts 49


Control Panel

Media Menu

Setting Item

Manual PaperType

(*1)

Manual PaperSize

(*1)

Description, Instructions

Choose the type of sheets to be loaded manually.

(→P.162)

Choose the size of paper to be loaded manually.

(→P.163)

Roll Media Type (*1) Choose the size of the roll.

(→P.124)

Chk Remain.Roll

Roll Length Set

Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.

Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.

If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed in meters or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit.



Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide

(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

50 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Paper Details

Setting Item

(The paper type is displayed here.)(*1)

Roll DryingTime

Scan Wait Time

Feed Priority

Adjust Length

Head Height

Skew Check Lv.


Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.

Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait time.

Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select

Automatic. Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing

Print Length may result in slight banding in the direction of

Carriage scanning.

Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length.

Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper.

Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).

For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower adjustment value.

Adjust the Printhead height. (→P.588)

If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

VacuumStrngth

NearEnd RollMrgn

Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.

Cut Speed

Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen

. (→P.595)

Trim Edge First

Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.

If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.

Choose On to have 40 mm (1.6 in) cut off the leading edge of the roll after you load the roll. Scraps are then removed.

When Automatic is selected, if the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll are uneven (by 3 mm [0.12 in] or more), the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge after you load the roll. Scraps are then removed.

If the unevenness is less than 3 mm or if Off is selected, the edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.

Printer Parts 51


Control Panel

Setting Item

(The paper type is displayed here.)(*1)

Cutting Mode

Bordless Margin

CutDustReduct.


Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed cutter.

Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after printing. If you choose Eject, the paper is cut after you hold down the Stop button for a second or more. If you choose

Manual, the paper will not be cut after printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.

Adjust the margin during borderless printing.

Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the paper width and congure the margin settings for borderless printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is selected, choose Fixed. In this case, the paper width is not detected automatically, and the document is printed without borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.

Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting lm and similar media by printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper. (→P.134)

NearEnd Sht Mrgn

Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.

Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading edge.

Manual Feed

Return Defaults

When printing manually, choose the Paper Feed Slot .

Normally, choose Top . For heavyweight paper such as POP

Board , choose Front .

Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default values.



Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.

52 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Adjust Printer

Auto Head Adj.

Adjust Length

Calibration

Setting Item

Manual Head Adj

Auto Band Adj.

Manual Band Adj

Adj Far Ed Feed

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Print

Standard Adj.

Advanced Adj.

Auto Adjust

Calibration Log

Use Adj. Value

Return Defaults


Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. (→P.584)

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the nozzle and printing direction. (→P.584)

Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the

Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the Printhead .

(→P.584)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.

(→P.586)

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. (→P.589)

Choose this option when using paper other than genuine

Canon paper, or paper for purposes other than checking output.

Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note that this function takes more time and requires more ink than Standard Adj. (→P.589)

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount based on the paper type.

Choose Yes for adjustment of the feed amount of the trailing edge.

Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the amount of adjustment. (→P.596)

Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjustment value after a test pattern for color calibration is printed. The latest color calibration adjustment value is applied for all paper.

The date of color calibration and the paper type is indicated on the Display Screen .

Select Disabled and press the OK button to print without applying the color calibration adjustment value. The printer driver settings are given priority.

Select Enabled and press the OK button to apply the color calibration adjustment value in printing. However, the printer driver settings will be given priority.

Clears the color calibration adjustment value and log.

Printer Parts 53


Control Panel

Interface Setup

Setting Item

EOP Timer

TCP/IP IP Mode

NetWare

AppleTalk

Protocol

IP Setting

NetWare

Frame Type

Print Service

Ethernet Driver Auto Detect

Comm.Mode

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

Ext. Interface

Return Defaults

MAC Address

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default G/W


Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.

Choose whether the printer IP address is congured automatically or a static IP address is entered manually.

Specify the protocol used to congure the IP address automatically.

Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask and default gateway.

Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Specify the frame type to use.

Choose the print service.

Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol.

To apply your changes, choose Register

Setting .

Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting .

Choose On for automatic conguration of the

LAN communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings values of Comm.Mode and

Ethernet Type.

Choose the LAN communication method.

Choose the LAN transfer rate.

Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.

Displays the MAC address.

Choose the expansion interface.

Execute? is displayed if you press the ▼ button. Choose OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

54 Printer Parts


Maintenance

Setting Item

Repl. maint cart

Replace P.head

Move Printer

Clean Platen

Spur Cleaning

Control Panel


When replacing the Maintenance Cartridge , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.632)

Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining

Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.

When replacing the Printhead , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.625)

When transferring the printer to another location, follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.648)

After you select Yes, the Carriage is moved and the printer is ready for Platen cleaning.

Click Yes to clean the spurs. (→P.644)


Printer Parts 55

Control Panel

System Setup

Warning

Setting Item

Keep Media Size

Buzzer

Detect Mismatch


Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.

Choose Warning for notication (display of a warning message) during printing if the paper type specied in the printer menu does not match the paper type in the printer driver. Choose None to continue to print without notication. Choose Pause to have printing paused under these circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing by pressing the Online button.

Select On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing instead of other settings. The margin setting of the printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images in the trailing margin from being printed.

Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the margin setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of the printer driver, text or images will not be cut off. However, this requires longer paper because the actual margin will be equal to the margin setting of the printer driver plus the margin setting of the printer menu.

Paper Size Basis

TrimEdge Reload

Sht Selection



If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3+ or 13"x19"(Super B) is applied when an intermediate size is detected.

If roll size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3

(297mm) or 300mm Roll is applied when a roll of an intermediate width is detected.

If roll size detection is activated, choose whether 10in.

(254mm) or JIS B4 (257mm) is applied when a roll of an intermediate width is detected.

When Automatic is selected, the leading edge will be cut as needed, taking into account how long the paper has been loaded without being printed. (However, it is not cut if Cutting

Mode is set to Manual.)

Choose On to cut the leading edge.

56 Printer Parts


Setting Item

Noz. Check Freq.

Sleep Timer

Length Unit

Time Zone

Date Format

Date & Time

Language

Contrast Adj.

Reset PaprSetngs

Date

Time

Control Panel


Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging.

Choose 1 page to check once per printed page. Choose

10 pages to check once per ten printed pages. Choose

Automatic to have the printer automatically adjust the timing for checks based on the frequency of nozzle use.

Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.

Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed.

You can switch the unit displayed for Roll Length Set and the remaining paper amount displayed in the submenu.

Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean

Time.

Specify the date format.

Set the current date.

Set the current time.

Specify the language used on the Display Screen .

Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.

Restores settings that you have changed with Media

Conguration Tool to the factory default values. If paper added using the Media Conguration Tool was used for color calibration, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper.


Printer Parts 57

Control Panel

Information

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

Setting Item

Version Firm

Boot

MIT


Displays the printer rmware version.

Displays the version of the boot ROM.

Displays the version of the MIT database format.

Displays the printer’s serial number.

Displays the MAC address of the printer.

s/n

MAC

IP

########-####

Displays the printer’s IP address.

Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).


Document Name Displays the document name in the last print job.

User Name

Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.

Page Count

Job Status

Displays the number of pages in the print job.

Displays the results of the print job processed.


Displays the time when the print job was started.

Print End Time

Displays the time when the print job was nished.

Print Time

Print Size

Displays the time required to print the job.

Displays the paper size in the print job.

Media Type

Interface

Displays the paper type in the print job.

Displays the interface used for the print job.

Ink Consumed

Displays the ink consumption.

58 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Main Menu Settings (During Printing)

Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.


For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.35)

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Head Cleaning


Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.

Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A.

Fine Band Adj.

Information

Displayed during print jobs. For ne-tuning the feed amount.

Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs. (→P.60)


Printer Parts 59

Control Panel

Information

System Info

Error Log

Job Log

Setting Item

Version

Ext I/F

Firm

Boot

MIT


Displays the printer rmware version.

Displays the version of the boot ROM.

Displays the version of the MIT database format.

Displays the name of interfaces compatible with the expansion slot.

Displays the printer’s serial number.

Displays the MAC address.

s/n

MAC

IP

######## -

####

Displays the printer’s IP address.

Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).


Document Name Displays the document name in the last print job.

User Name

Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.

Page Count

Displays the number of pages in the print job.

Job Status

Displays the results of the print job processed.


Displays the time when the print job was started.

Print End Time

Displays the time when the print job was nished.

Print Time

Displays the time required to print the job.

Print Size

Displays the paper size in the print job.

Media Type

Interface

Displays the paper type in the print job.

Displays the interface used for the print job.

Ink Consumed

Displays the ink consumption.

60 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Submenu Display

Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, and printer information.

Each time you press the Information button, the following submenus are displayed.

Note

•

Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.

•

After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ten seconds if no print job is received or if you do not operate the printer.

Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels

The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the top level of the Display Screen.

The remaining level of each ink is shown on the bottom level of the Display Screen. Ink levels shown on the

Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the color labels on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have deactivated ink level detection.

Remaining ink is indicated as follows.

Information of the loaded paper

Here, the paper size, type, and related printer settings are displayed.

Printer information

Displays the rmware version, serial number, MAC address, IP address, and interface information.

Printer Parts 61


Control Panel

Status Print

You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.

With Status Print, information is printed regarding the printer rmware version, various settings, and the utilization level of consumables.

Printing Status Print Reports

1.

Load paper.

If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized. You will need at least four sheets.

2.

Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.

Checking the information in the Status Print report

The following information is included in the Status Print report.

Canon imagePROGRAF iPF6100 Status Print Printer model

Firm

Boot

MIT

S/N

MC

Y, PC, C, PGY, GY, BK, PM, M,

MBK, R, G, and B

Firmware version

Boot version

MIT format version

Printer serial number

Maintenance Cartridge capacity (%)

Ink levels.

The remaining ink is displayed in a ve-level scale.

62 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Media Menu

Roll Media Type

Check Remain. Roll

Cut Sheet Type

Adjust Printer

Head Adjust

Auto Print

A1-F2

Feed Priority

Adjust Length

Calibration

Execution Log

Date:

Media:

Use Effect Value:

Information on the loaded paper.

Current printer settings.

Printhead adjustment value.

Settings related to paper feeding.

The color calibration setting value.

The calibration log.

Indicates the date calibration was performed and the type of paper used.

This value indicates whether the results of color calibration are used or not.


Printer Parts 63

Control Panel

Interface Setup

EOP Timer

TCP/IP

Current network settings.

Sets the elapsed time between receiving last data and canceling printing.

Settings related to TCP/IP .

IP Mode

Protocol

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

IP Setting IP Setting values.

NetWare

Frame Type

Print Service

AppleTalk

Ethernet Driver

Auto Detect

Comm.Mode

Ethernet Type

Spanning Tree

MAC Address

IP Address

Subnet

Mask

Default

G/W

NetWare settings.

Values that specify whether AppleTalk is active or not.

Ethernet Driver settings.

64 Printer Parts


System Setup

Warning Current warning and error settings.

Buzzer

Detect mismatch

Keep Media Size Current paper-related settings.

Sheet Selection 1

Sheet Selection 2

Roll Selection 1

Roll Selection 2

Nozzle Check

Sleep Timer

Length Unit

Nozzle-check settings.

General printer settings.

Time Zone

Date Format

Language

Contrast Adj.

Information

RAM

Ext. Interface

Error Log

System information and an error log.

Control Panel


Printer Parts 65

Control Panel

Network (RemoteUI)

TCP/IP

Frame Type

Use BOOTP

Use DHCP

Use RARP

Raw Mode Bi-direction

Enable DNS Dynamic

Update

Use Zeroconf Function

IP Address*

Subnet Mask*

Gateway Address*

LPD Printing

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

RAW Printing

Raw Port Number

FTP Printing

SMTP Server Address*

Primary DNS Server

Address*

Secondary DNS Server

Address*

DNS Host Name*

DNS Domain Name*

Multicast DNS Service

Name

Current network settings used by RemoteUI.

*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.

NetWare Current NetWare settings.

Frame Type

IPX External Network

Number*

Node Number*

Print Service

*: Depending on the NetWare print service settings, information on one of the following four items is printed.

66 Printer Parts


Control Panel

Bindery PServer

File Server

Name*

Print Server

Name*

Print Server

Password*

Polling Interval

RPrinter

Print Server

Name*

Printer Number*

NDS PServer

Tree Name*

Context name*

Print Server

Name*

Print Server

Password*

Polling Interval

NPrinter

Print Server

Name*

Printer Number*

Values set when NetWare > Print Service > Bindery PServer is selected.

Values set when NetWare > Print Service > RPrinter is selected.

Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NDS PServer is selected.

Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NPrinter is selected.



Printer Parts 67

Control Panel

AppleTalk

Phase Type

Name*

Network Number*

Zone*

Current AppleTalk settings.


HEAD LOT NUMBER Printhead lot number.

LOT R,L

Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.

PARTS STATUS

COUNTER A-I

COUNTER

CUTTER

MEDIA

MEDIA1-7

NAME

TTL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

AFTER INSTALLATION

Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how much they have been used).

68 Printer Parts


Optional accessories

Stand

The printer can be mounted on the following Stand.

•

Printer Stand ST-25

Note

•

For details on assembling the Stand, refer to the instructions provided with the Stand.

Optional accessories


Printer Parts 69


Roll Holder Set

A set of parts including a Roll Holder, Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores), 3-Inch Paper Core

Attachment, and Spacer for Borderless Printing (used for both 2- and 3-inch paper cores).

To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Roll Holder and attach the Holder Stopper for 3-inch paper cores. If you use an A1 (594 mm [23.4 in]) roll or A2 (420 mm [16.5 in]) roll for borderless printing, insert the Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder.

•

Roll Holder Set RH2-24

•

Roll Holder

•

Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores (a) and (b))

•

3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

•

Spacer for Borderless Printing

For instructions on installing these parts, see “Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder”. (→P.144)

70 Printer Parts



IEEE 1394 Expansion Board

An interface board to add an IEEE 1394 (also called "FireWire") port.

•

IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-05

For instructions on installing the IEEE 1394 expansion board, refer to the documentation provided with the optional IEEE 1394 expansion board.


Printer Parts 71

Printer Specications

Printer Specications

Specications

Important

•

This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.

•

The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.

Printer

Power supply

Power consumption

Operating noise

Operating environment

Dimensions (W × D

× H)

In operation

Sleep mode

Off

Temperature

Humidity

Printer only

With stand

Printer only

With stand

100-120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

100 W max.

100-120 V: 5 W max.

(8 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board is installed.)

220-240 V: 6 W max.


1 W max. (*1)

Approx. 49 dB (A) max.

15-30°C (59-86°F)

10-80%, non-condensing

1,177×670×348 mm (46.3 × 26.4 × 13.7 in)

1,177×861×993 mm (46.3 × 33.9× 39.1 in)

-

51 kg (112.4 lb) Weight

(not including the

Printhead and Ink

Tank )

Space required for installation (*2)

Applicable standards

Printer only

With stand

1,477×1,770×648 mm (58.1 × 80.7 × 25.5 in)

1,477×1,770×1,294 mm (58.1 × 80.7 × 50.9 in)

International Energy Star Program, Law on Promoting Green

Purchasing, GPN, RoHS, The Eco Declaration, WEEE, U.S.

presidential directives

*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption, turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

*2: Normally, you will need to ensure an unobstructed space of 800 mm (31.5 in) in front of the printer, 300 mm (11.8 in) behind, 150 mm (5.9 in) on both sides, and 300 mm (11.8 in) above the printer. Only when printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot, leave 1,300 mm (51.2 in) of unobstructed space in front of the printer and 700 mm (27.6 in) behind it.

72 Printer Parts



Printing performance

Print method

Maximum resolution

Printhead

Number of nozzles

Bubblejet

2400 dpi horizontally (*1) × 1200 dpi vertically

PF-03

2,560 per color

*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.

Interface

Expansion Board Slots

USB 2.0(*1)

Ethernet (*3)

IEEE 1394 (*2)

Format

Mode

Connector

Format

Specication

Protocols

Format

Specication

1

Internal port

Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer

Series B (4-pin)

Internal port

IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX

/Auto-Negotiation, and IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex

IPX/SPX (Netware 4.2, 5.1, 6.0), SNMP, HTTP, TCP/IP,

AppleTalk

Optional boards (slot type)

IEEE 1394-1995, conforms to P1394a Specication ver. 2.0, half duplex, Data/Strb differential serial

100/200/400 Mbps

Conforms to IEEE 1394-1995 (6-pin), no power supply

Transfer speed

Connector

*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:

•

Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible

•

Operating system: Windows

Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000 or Mac OS X ver. 10.3.3

or later

•

USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft

USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)

•

USB cable: Certied

USB 2.0 cable

*2: One IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board can be installed.

*3: In the European Union, use a shielded LAN cable to comply with EN 55022: 1998 +A1: 2000 and

A2: 2003.

Printer Parts 73



Ink

Ink Tank

Capacity

Y Ink Tank ( Yellow Ink )

PC Ink Tank ( Photo Cyan

Ink )

B Ink Tank ( Blue Ink )

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

PFI-101Y (user-replaceable)

PFI-101PC (user-replaceable)

C Ink Tank ( Cyan Ink ) Pigment ink PFI-101C (user-replaceable)

PGY Ink Tank ( Photo Gray

Ink )

Pigment ink PFI-103PGY (user-replaceable)

GY Ink Tank ( Gray Ink )

BK Ink Tank ( Black Ink )

Pigment ink PFI-103GY (user-replaceable)

Pigment ink PFI-103BK (user-replaceable)

PM Ink Tank ( Photo

Magenta Ink )

Pigment ink PFI-101PM (user-replaceable)

M Ink Tank ( Magenta Ink ) Pigment ink PFI-101M (user-replaceable)

MBK Ink Tank ( Matte Black

Ink , or black ink for matte paper)

Pigment ink PFI-103MBK (user-replaceable)

R Ink Tank ( Red Ink )

G Ink Tank ( Green Ink )

Pigment ink

Pigment ink

PFI-101R (user-replaceable)

PFI-101G (user-replaceable)

Pigment ink PFI-101B (user-replaceable)

130 ml per color (*1)

*1: Printable pages when using the provided Starter Ink Tanks (90 ml per tank)

74 Printer Parts



Paper (*1)

Paper width

Maximum length per page

Thickness

Paper size

Print area

Sheets

Rolls

Sheets

Tray (top)

Tray (front)

Tray (top)

Tray (front)

Rolls

Sheets Supported sizes

Rolls

Normal size

Tray (top)

Tray (front)

Borderless printing (*2)

Oversized (*2), (*3)

Supported width for borderless printing

250-610 mm (9.8-24 in)

1,600 mm (63.0 in)

914 mm (36.0 in)

18 m (19.7 yd.)

0.08-0.8 mm (0.003-0.031 in)

0.8-1.5 mm (0.031-0.060 in)

0.08-0.8 mm (0.003-0.031 in)

ISO A1, ISO A2, ISO A2+, ISO A3, ISO A3+, ISO A4, ISO B2,

ISO B3, ISO B4, JIS B2, JIS B3, JIS B4, 22"x34" (ANSI D),

17"x22" (ANSI C), 11"x17" (Ledger), 13"x19" (SuperB), Letter

(8.5"x11"), Legal (8.5"x14"), 24"x36" (ARCH D), 18"x24"

(ARCH C), 12"x18" (ARCH B), 9"x12" (ARCH A), DIN C2,

DIN C3, DIN C4, 20"x24", 18"x22", 14"x17", 12"x16", 10"x12",

10"x15", 8"x10", US Photo 16"x20", Poster 20"x30", 13"x22",

Poster 300x900 mm

•

Width: 203-610 mm (8-24 in)

•

Length: 279-1,600 mm (11-63 in)

•

Width: 250-610 mm (8-24 in)

•

Length: 350-914 mm (14-36 in)

8 inches (203 mm), 10 inches (254 mm), JIS B4 (257 mm),

ISO A3/A4 (297 mm), Banner (300 mm), A3+ (329 mm), 14 inches (356 mm), 16 inches (407 mm), ISO A2/A3 (420 mm),

17 inches (432 mm), JIS B2/B3 (515 mm), ISO A1/A2 (594 mm), 24 inches (610 mm)

Printable area

•

Sheets ( Top Paper Feed Slot )

Top: 3 mm (0.12 in); bottom: 3 or 23 mm (0.9 in); left and right sides: 3 mm. (The bottom value varies depending on the type of paper.)

•

Sheets ( Front Paper Feed Slot )

3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.9 in) on bottom, and 3 mm (0.12 in) on both sides

•

Rolls

3 mm (0.12 in) from each side

For information on the recommended print area, see “Print

Area”. (→P.78)

Printable area (rolls)

Entire surface

Printable area

Entire surface

10 inches (254 mm), JIS B4 (257 mm), A3+ (329 mm), 14 inches (356 mm), 16 inches (407 mm), ISO A2/A3 (420 mm)

(*4), 17 inches (432 mm), JIS B2/B3 (515 mm), ISO A1/A2

(594 mm) (*4), 24 inches (610 mm)

Printer Parts 75




(→P.108)

*2: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper.

*3: Load paper at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm higher than the size selected in Page Size for roll paper. Or, load paper at least 6 mm wider and 26 mm (1.0 in) higher for the tray.

*4: Borderless printing requires the Spacer for Borderless Printing.

76 Printer Parts



Basic Environmental Performance

Printer

Power consumption

Resource efciency

Product safety

Sleep mode

Operating noise

100-120 V: 5 W max.


220-240 V: 6 W max.


1 W max.

Printer only: 51 kg (112.4 lb)

Off

Weight

Dimensions (W × D ×

H)

Printer only: 1,177×670×348 mm (46.3 × 26.4 × 13.7 in)

Recycling Recyclable plastic used for printer body

Toxic substances Structural components: No prohibited brominated ame retardants used (PBB or PBDE)

Body plastic: No heavy metals (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], or Cd) or halogenated ame retardants used

Approx. 49 dB (A) max.

Packaging materials

Heavy metal content (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], and Cd) None (none in packaging)


Printer Parts 77


Print Area

A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.

Sheets

Top Paper

Feed Slot

Top Edge

3 mm (0.12

in)

Printable Area

Bottom

Edge

3/23 mm

(0.12/0.91

in)

Sides

3 mm (0.12

in)

Recommended Print Area

Top Edge

Bottom

Edge

Sides

20 mm (0.79

in)

27 mm (1.06

in)

5 mm (0.20

in)

Front Paper

Feed Slot

3 mm (0.12

in)

23 mm (0.91

in)

3 mm (0.12

in)

Rolls

0/3 mm

(0/0.12 in)

0/3 mm

(0/0.12 in)

0/3 mm

(0/0.12 in)

20 mm (0.79

in)

5 mm (0.20

in)

5 mm (0.20

in)

Sheets

•

Printable Area:

Printing from the Top Paper Feed Slot requires a margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides. (A bottom margin of 23 mm [0.9 in] may sometimes be required.) The bottom margin is 23 mm for some types of paper.

For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

When printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot, a margin of 23 mm (0.9 in) on all sides is required.

•

Recommended print area:

A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 27 mm (1.06 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is required.

Note

•

Printable area: The area that can be printed.

•

Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.

•

To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes the required margin. (→P.277)

•

You can choose a bottom margin of 3 mm or 23 mm when printing from the Top Paper Feed Slot.

In the printer driver, choosing Manual in Media Source sets the bottom margin at 23 mm. On the other hand, choosing Manual (3mm margins) in Media Source sets the bottom margin at 3 mm, which provides a larger area for printing.

However, the option Manual (3mm margins) is not available with the following paper.

•

Fine Art Photo Paper

•

Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Paper

•

Fine Art Textured Paper

•

The types of paper listed above may be updated, in some cases.

For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

•

If you set the bottom margin at 3 mm, images in the bottom margin may be distorted.

In this case, choose Manual in Media Source to set the bottom margin at 23 mm.

78 Printer Parts



Rolls

•

Printable Area:

A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference

Guide. (→P.108)

•

Recommended print area:

A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is required.

Note

•

Printable area: The area that can be printed.

•

Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.

•

To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes the required margin. (→P.277)


Printer Parts 79

Printing procedure

Basic Printing Workow

Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Rolls

These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.

Follow the steps below to switch to a new roll or a roll of a different type or width before printing.

Note

•

If a sheet is loaded in the Top Paper Feed Slot, remove it before this procedure. (→P.146)

•

Before printing banners or other long documents, spread a clean cloth or paper on the oor or use the

Output Stacker to prevent the printed surface from becoming dirty from the oor after printing.

•

If you will wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate automatic cutting and print a cut line instead. (→P.129)

1.

Turn the printer on. (→P.19)

2.

Select roll paper as the paper source. (→P.115)

80 Basic Printing Workow


3.

Load a roll on the Roll Holder. (→P.116)

Note

•

When switching rolls, rst remove the current roll from the Roll Holder. (→P.118)

Printing procedure

4.

Load the roll in the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.119)


Basic Printing Workow 81

Printing procedure

5.

Select the paper type. (→P.124)

6.

Select the paper length. (→P.125)



7.

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.

•

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.93)

•

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.95)

•

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9) (→P.97)

Printing procedure

Important

•

Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

•

Papr Size Mismatch (→P.692)

•

Papr Type Mismatch (→P.691)

•

Paper Mismatch (→P.691)



Printing procedure

8.

Start printing.

•

Printing from Windows (→P.88)

•

Printing from Mac OS X (→P.89)

•

Printing from Mac OS 9 (→P.91)

Note

•

Steps 5 and 6 are not required, if a barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. The paper type and amount of paper left are automatically detected.

•

Keeping a roll in the printer for a long time without printing on it may leave a depression on the leading edge.

When printing quality is most important, we recommend setting TrimEdge Reload to On or Automatic so that the paper edge is automatically cut before printing.

•

For details on supported sizes and types of the roll that can be loaded, see Paper Sizes (→P.113) or the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

•

Clean the platen after you have used up a roll. (→P.640)

•

When a roll has been advanced, do not pull it out by force. This will prevent the paper from being advanced.

If you accidentally pull out the paper, hold the Load/Eject button to enable feeding again.

(→P.122)

•

When printing on rolls after printing on sheets, if the lit paper selection lamp does not switch from the

Cut Sheet lamp to the Roll Media lamp, press the Feeder Selection button.



Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed Slot

These are the basic steps for loading sheets in the paper feed slot and then printing from this slot.

Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets in the paper feed slot.

Note

•

If a roll is loaded, rewind the roll before this procedure.

(→P.146)

1.

Turn the printer on. (→P.19)

2.

Complete settings in the printer driver for the type and size of paper and other details.

•


•


•




Printing procedure

3.

Send the print job.

•

Printing from Windows (→P.88)

•

Printing from Mac OS X (→P.89)

•

Printing from Mac OS 9 (→P.91)

4.

Load sheets manually. (→P.156)

(Top Paper Feed Slot)

(Front Paper Feed Slot)

Note

•

If you will load a sheet before sending a print job, you must select the type and size of paper in advance on the printer Display Screen. Follow these steps.

•

Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.162)

•

Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet) (→P.163)

Start printing.

Note

•

For details on supported sizes and types of the paper that can be loaded in the tray, see Paper Sizes

(→P.113) or the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)



Printing procedure

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets

The printer supports both rolls and sheets. Take advantage of each type of paper for a wide range of printing applications.

Rolls and Sheets

•

Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media.

Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.

•

Sheets refers to individual sheets of paper in regular sizes.

Sheets are loaded in the Top Paper Feed Slot.

Heavyweight paper is loaded in the Front Paper Feed Slot.

Paper Size

•

Page Size: The size of the image to be printed, as specied in the application.

•

Paper Size (also called Media Size):

•

In the case of sheets, paper size refers to the actual size of the paper loaded in the printer.

•

In the case of rolls, paper size is an imagined size set as the printing area for a single page.

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets

Printing Method

Large-Format Printing

Rolls

Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Ofce applications. Print banners up to 18 m (19.69 yd) long.

Borderless Printing

Free Layout (Windows)

Free Layout (Macintosh)

Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

Banner Printing Print pages of a multi-page document consecutively without blank space between pages.

Important

•

If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, be sure to attach the provided Spacer for Borderless

Printing on the Roll Holder. If you print without attaching it, the Platen may be soiled, which may cause ink to adhere to the unprinted side of the paper. (→P.144)



Printing procedure

Printing from Windows

Print from the application software menu.

Important

•

The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows:

•

Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)

•

Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

•

Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

•

Windows Vista

•

We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

1.

In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

After conrming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.

Note

•

The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the application software. In most cases, the dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software

Note

•

If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog box displayed after clicking Printer.

Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows:

•

From the application software

(→P.473)

•

From the operating system menu

(→P.149)



Printing procedure

Printing from Mac OS X

Print from the application menu after registering the printer.

Important

•


Registering the printer

Before printing, you must register the printer in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ).

For instructions on registering the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”.

(→P.573)

Important

•

During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.

•

By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk protocol before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.574)

Note

•

When registering the printer, choose USB if the printer is connected via USB, Canon FireWire(iPF) if connected via IEEE 1394, or AppleTalk, Canon IP(iPF), or Bonjour if connected via a network.

•

For Canon IP(iPF) connections, enter the printer’s IP address.



Printing procedure

Printing from the application software

1.


Note

•

This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2.

Select the printer in the Printer list.

3.

Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.



Printing procedure

Printing from Mac OS 9

After selecting the printer in Chooser from the Apple menu, print by using menus in the application software.

Important

•


Selecting the printer

Before printing, you must conrm that the printer is selected in Chooser.

For instructions on selecting the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”. (→P.573)

Important

•

During this setup process, the printer will not be listed in Chooser if it is off or disconnected.

•

By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk protocol before using the printer in AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.574)

Note

•

In Chooser, choose GARO Printer Driver.

•

In Destination, choose USB if the printer is connected via USB, FireWire if connected via IEEE 1394, or AppleTalk, IP Print, or IP Print (Auto) if connected via network.

•

If the printer is connected via AppleTalk, click Active under AppleTalk in the lower-right corner of the Chooser window.

•

If the printer is connected via IP Print, click Registering IP Address under the Destination list to register the printer’s IP address, and then click IP Print.



Printing procedure

Printing from the application software

1.


Note

•

This dialog box includes basic printing options for the range of pages, number of copies, and so on. You can also specify enlargement or reduction, borderless printing, and a variety of other print settings.

2.

Make sure the printer is selected in the Printer list.

3.




Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

Important

•

Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

1.

Choose Print in the application menu.

2.

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.473)

3.

Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4.

In the

A

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5.

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

6.

In the

A

Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.

7.

In the

L

Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.



Printing procedure

8.

If you have selected Roll Paper in

L

Media Source, select the width of the loaded roll in

M

Roll

Paper Width.

Note

•

A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.

For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.441)



Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)


1.

Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.

2.

Select the printer in the

B

Format for list.

3.

Choose the original size in the

C

Paper Size list.

4.

Click

F

OK to close the dialog box.

5.


6.

Access the Main pane.

7.

In the

A




Printing procedure

8.

Access the Page Setup pane.

9.

In the

A


10.

If you have selected Cut Sheet or Manual in

A

Media Source, make sure the size as selected in

Page Setup is displayed in

C

Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in

A

Media Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in

B

Roll Paper Width.

Note

•

If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in

B

Roll Paper Width, click

L

Printer

Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Note

•


For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.492)



Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9)


1.

Select the printer in Chooser.

2.


3.


A

Page Size list.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.

Make sure the Main pane is displayed.

7.

In the

C




Printing procedure

8.

Access the Finishing pane.

9.

In the

A


10.

If you have selected Roll Paper in

A

Media Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in

B

Roll Paper Width.

Note

•


B


L

Printer


Note

•


For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.517)



Canceling print jobs

Canceling print jobs

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel print jobs or ink drying in progress when the printer is online, ofine, or in Menu mode.

Printer operation varies depending on the status when you hold down the Stop button for a second or more during printing.

•

If you press the Stop button before printing starts

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more before printing cancels the print job and brings the printer online.

When the roll is selected as the paper source, the printer goes online, and when sheet is selected, the printer goes ofine.

•

If you press the Stop button during printing

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more during printing stops printing immediately.




•

If you press the Stop button when printing is paused

Holding down the Stop button for a second or more when printing is paused cancels the print job.




Canceling Print Jobs from Windows

You can cancel print jobs in the printer window.

1.

Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.

Note

•

You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or

Printers ) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.

2.

Choose Cancel All Documents in the Printer menu to stop the print processing.

To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.

1.

If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data

lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.




Do the following if no print jobs are shown in the printer window (because they have already been sent to the printer).

1.

Double-click the taskbar icon to access the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

2.

On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.



Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X

You can cancel print jobs in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

1.

Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.

2.

Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.


In this window, you can cancel jobs sent to the printer.

Note

•

The print job is displayed on the printer’s screen during the transmission of print data from the computer. When the transmission is completed, the job is not displayed even during printing.

3.

Click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.




4.

Select the print job to cancel and click the Cancel Job button to remove the print job.

The job sent to the printer is canceled.

Note

•

The print job is displayed on the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window while the printer receives the print data from the computer. It is not displayed before transmission of print data to the printer, even if the computer has started the process of the data.

5.

Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Start Jobs.

Important

•

Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.


1.






Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS 9

How to cancel print jobs varies depending on whether you are printing in the foreground or background.

Canceling background print jobs

1.

Open the Garo Printer Extra folder, which was installed on the hard disk at the same time as the printer driver.

2.

Open imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

3.

Choose Pause Printing in the File menu to stop print processing.

The job status changes from Sending to Send.

4.

Select the print job to cancel and click the Cancel Job button to remove the print job.

5.

Choose Resume Printing in the File menu.

Important

•

Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart the print queue, the next job cannot be printed.





1.



Canceling foreground print jobs

1.

When the progress indicator is displayed, hold down the Command key and press the period

(.) key to cancel print jobs.

2.





Handling Paper

Paper

Paper

The printer supports the following types of paper.

Paper Type

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

Paper Size

Roll

Sheets

Paper width

Outer diameter

Inner diameter of paper core

Printing surface

203-610 mm (8-24 in)

Up to 150 mm (6 in)

2 or 3 inches

Top (outside)

203 × 279 mm to 610 × 1,600 mm

(8.0 × 11.0 in to 24.0 × 63.0 in)

Note

•

Paper quality varies among manufacturers. Before buying paper, contact the Canon dealer where you purchased the printer.

Paper


Handling Paper 107

Paper

Types of Paper

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . This guide identies supported plain paper, coated paper, photo paper (such as glossy photo paper), proong paper,

CAD paper, and other types of paper. The Paper Reference Guide identies types and specications of paper, as well as information on printer driver settings and tips on handling paper.

You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide , on the printer Control Panel, and in the printer driver by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website.

Note

•

The media types with "†" marked in the product name are those specied as genuine Canon media.

For other media, please contact the respective media manufacturer after reading the instruction manuals supplied with the media.

Viewing the Paper Reference Guide

You can access the Paper Reference Guide as follows. Follow the steps for your particular operating system.

•

Windows

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)

The online support window is displayed.

2.

Select Paper Reference Guide.

108 Handling Paper


The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.

•

Mac OS X

1.

Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.


2.

Select Paper Reference Guide.

Paper


Handling Paper 109

Paper


•

Mac OS 9

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Paper Reference Guide icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)


110 Handling Paper


Updating paper information

You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about the Media Conguration Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration

Tool Guide (Macintosh).

Follow these steps to access the imagePROGRAF website.

Important

•

When you update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool, the paper type setting on the

Control Panel, in the printer driver, and in related software is updated.

•

Windows

1.

Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model.)

Paper


2.

Select Stay Informed.

The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.


Handling Paper 111

Paper

•

Mac OS X

1.

Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.


2.

Select Stay Informed.

The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.

Note

•

In Windows, you can also access the imagePROGRAF webpage by clicking the start menu, selecting

Programs > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) > iPFxxxx

Media Conguration Tool to start the Media Conguration Tool, and clicking Extra Information.

•

On a Macintosh computer, you can also access the imagePROGRAF website from the Finder by selecting Applications (in Mac OS X or OS 9) > Canon Utilities > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool

(here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) > MCTxxxx to start the Media Conguration Tool and then clicking Extra Information.

112 Handling Paper


Paper

Paper Sizes

You can use the following sizes of paper.

Sheets

You can use sheets in the following sizes, up to 610 mm (24 in) wide.

Paper Size

Dimensions

ISO A1

594 × 841 mm (23 × 33 in)

ISO A2

420 × 594 mm (16.5 × 23 in)

ISO A2+

ISO A3

ISO A3+

ISO A4

ISO B2

ISO B3

ISO B4

JIS B2

JIS B3

JIS B4

22"x34"(ANSI D)

17"x22"(ANSI C)

11"x17" (Ledger)

13"x19" (Super B)

DIN C3

DIN C4

20"x24"

18"x22"

14"x17"

12"x16"

10"x12"

10"x15"

Letter (8.5"x11")

Legal (8.5"x14")

24"x36" (ARCH D)

18"x24" (ARCH C)

12"x18" (ARCH B)

9"x12" (ARCH A)

DIN C2

432 × 610 mm (17 × 24 in)

297 × 420 mm (12 × 17 in)

329 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)

210 × 297 mm (8 × 12 in)

500 × 707 mm (20 × 28 in)

353 × 500 mm (14 × 20 in)

250 × 353 mm (10 × 14 in)

515 × 728 mm (20 × 29 in)

364 × 515 mm (14 × 20 in)

257 × 364 mm (10 × 14 in)

559 × 864 mm (22 × 34 in)

432 × 559 mm (17 × 22 in)

279 × 432 mm (11 × 17 in)

330 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)

216 × 279 mm (9 × 11 in)

216 × 356 mm (9 × 14 in)

610 × 914 mm (24 × 36 in)

457 × 610 mm (18 × 24 in)

305 × 457 mm (12 × 18 in)

229 × 305 mm (9 × 12 in)

458 × 648 mm (18 × 26 in)

324 × 458 mm (13 × 18 in)

229 × 324 mm (9 × 13 in)

508 × 610 mm (20 × 24 in)

457 × 559 mm (18 × 22 in)

355 × 432 mm (14 × 17 in)

304 × 406 mm (12 × 16 in)

254 × 305 mm (10 × 12 in)

254 × 381 mm (10 × 15 in)


No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Feeding from

Cassette

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Handling Paper 113

Paper

Paper Size

US Photo 16"x20"

Poster 20"x30"

13"x22"

Poster 300x900mm

Custom Media

Size

Top Paper

Feed Slot

Front Paper

Feed Slot

Dimensions

406 × 508 mm (16 × 20 in)

508 × 762 mm (20 × 30 in)

329 × 558 mm (13 × 22 in)

203× 520 mm (8× 21 in) - 610 × 914 mm (24 × 36 in)

Feeding from

Cassette

Yes

No

Yes

300 × 900 mm (12 × 35 in) No

203 × 279 mm (8 × 11 in) - 610 × 1600 mm (24 × 63 in) No

No

Rolls

Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.

•

Outer diameter: up to 150 mm (6 in)

•

Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches

•

Printing side out

Identication in Roll Paper Width in

Printer Driver (*1)

24-in. Roll (610mm)

Yes

ISO A1/A2 Roll (594mm)

JIS B2/B3 Roll (515mm)

17-in. Roll (432mm)


16-in. Roll (407mm)

14-in. Roll (356mm)

A3+ Roll (329mm)

300mm Roll (300mm)


JIS B4 Roll (257mm)

10-in. Roll (254mm)

8-in. Roll (203mm)

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes (*2)

Yes

Yes

Yes (*2)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Borderless Printing (*1)

*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference

Guide (→P.108)

*2: Requires the Spacer for Borderless Printing.

Note

•

In the printer driver, paper sizes are categorized into groups based on the “size system,” such as ISO A and JIS. In Windows and Mac OS 9, some size systems are not available by default.

•

For details on non-standard Custom Media Size, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes”. (→P.331)

•

Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

114 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Handling rolls

Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source

You can switch the paper source between the roll and the sheet by pressing the Feeder Selection button.

Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll (indicated by the Roll Media

lamp ) and the sheet (indicated by the Cut Sheet lamp ).

Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Roll Media lamp (a).

Caution

•

Paper jams may occur if you load paper other than the paper specied in the paper settings for the media source.

Note

•

You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:

•

If the Message lamp is ashing

Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.687)

•

If the Data lamp is ashing

Select the paper source after printing.

•

If a printer menu operation is in progress

Select the paper source after the menu operation.

•

When in the process of loading paper

Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.

•

When in the process of replacing Ink Tanks

Finish replacing the Ink Tanks before selecting the paper source.

•

If the Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.

After you select the roll as the paper source, a message is displayed instructing you to load the roll. At this point, load the roll. (→P.119)

Note

•

If any paper is loaded that will not be used, remove it before loading the roll.

(→P.122)

(→P.164)

Handling Paper 115


Handling rolls

Loading Rolls on the Roll Paper Holder

Note

•

For details on supported sizes and types of the roll that can be loaded, see Paper Sizes (→P.113) or the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

•

Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll.

•

If the edge of the roll is bent or soiled, use the Paper Cutting operation of the printer to cut the edge of the paper manually. (→P.129)

•

If the paper is badly creased or bent, cut the edge of the roll with scissors before loading the roll in the printer, and then cut the edge of the paper manually using the Paper Cutting operation of the printer. (→P.129)

•

To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the roll holder and attach the 3-Inch Paper Core Holder Stopper. (→P.144)

•

If you use a roll A2 or larger for Borderless Printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless

Printing on the Roll Holder.

Follow the steps 3 and 4 below.

1.

Remove the Holder Stopper from the Roll Holder.

2.

With the Roll Holder sideways and the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the roll in the Roll Holder from the left. Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange (a) of the Roll Holder.

116 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Important

•

Always put the Roll Holder sideways when loading rolls. If you accidentally load a roll when the Roll

Holder is upright, it may damage the Roll Holder.

•

Set the roll on a table or other at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping a roll may cause injury.

3.

Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown, pushing it rmly in until the

ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll.

Important

•

Insert the roll rmly until it touches the Holder Stopper. If it does not touch the stopper, feeding problems may occur.


Handling Paper 117

Handling rolls

Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder

1.

Remove the Holder Stopper from the Roll Holder.

2.

Remove the roll from the Roll Holder.

Important

•

After removal, store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight. If paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which may affect the printing quality when you use it again.

Note

•

How to remove the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment : (→P.144)

•

How to remove the Spacer for Borderless Printing : (→P.144)

118 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit

1.

Open the Roll Paper Unit Cover.

2.

With the edge of the roll paper facing up toward you, insert the Roll Holder shaft into the guide grooves (a) of the Roll Holder Slot on both sides. Make sure that the colors of the Roll Holder shaft ends (b) and the guide grooves match.

Caution

•

Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the guide grooves (a) and the Roll Holder shaft

(b) when loading rolls.

Note

•

If it is difcult to load rolls from the front, load them from behind the printer.

Handling Paper 119


Handling rolls

3.

Insert the edge of the roll paper into the Paper Feed Slot (a) and feed it manually until you hear the paper feed tone.

Important

•

Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you pull it out. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.

•

If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.

•

Load paper straight so it is not fed askew.

The printer now starts advancing the paper.

120 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

4.

Specify the type and length of the paper.

How the printer operates after the paper is fed varies depending on the setting for automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, as well as the barcode printed on rolls.

Automatic Detection of the

Barcodes

Printer Operation After the Paper is Fed

Remaining Roll Paper

On Printed The type and amount of paper left is automatically detected based on the barcode printed on the roll.

There is no need to specify the type and length of the paper.

Not printed You must specify the type and length of the paper. A menu for selection of the paper type and length is automatically shown on the Display

Screen .

(→P.124)

(→P.125)

Off Printed

Not printed

You must specify the type of paper.

(→P.124)

5.

Close the Roll Paper Unit Cover.

6.

If the edge of the roll is bent or soiled, cut the edge of the paper.

1.

Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to feed the roll paper to the position for cutting.

3.

Select Yes in Paper Cutting on Printer Menu, and then press the OK button. (→P.129)


Handling Paper 121

Handling rolls

Removing Rolls from the Roll Feed Unit

Caution

•

If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, always follow these steps to remove rolls. You will be unable to manage the amount of roll paper left if you remove the roll before the barcode is printed.

Important

•

When a roll has been advanced, do not pull it out by force. This will prevent the paper from being advanced, and you will be unable to manage the amount of roll paper left.

If you accidentally pull out the paper, hold down the Stop button to enable feeding.

1.

Press the Load/Eject button.

A conrmation message is displayed regarding removal of the roll.

2.

Press the OK button.

The roll can now be removed.

Note

•

If you need to cut the roll, select Paper Cutting and cut the roll at the desired position. (→P.129)

•

If you have selected Media Menu > Chk Remain.Roll > On in the printer menu and the printed document has been ejected, a barcode and brief text message are printed on the leading edge of rolls.

If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed. This is also the case when printing on 8-inch rolls or clear lm.

3.


122 Handling Paper


4.

Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder toward the back to rewind the roll.

Handling rolls

5.

Remove the Roll Holder from the Roll Holder Slot.

6.

Close the Roll Paper Unit Cover.


Handling Paper 123

Handling rolls

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)

When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.

Important

•

For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. That’s why the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If printing results are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.

(→P.589)

(→P.588)

Note

•

After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the

Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.125)

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Media Type, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108) By factory default, Plain

Paper is selected.

•

Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.

5.


124 Handling Paper


Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)

When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.

Handling rolls

Note

•

When you specify the roll length in the printer menu, Chk Remain.Roll must be set to On. If it is

Off, the Roll Length Set menu is not shown.

•

After you load a roll and specify the roll type, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the roll length on the Display Screen if no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the roll length, and then press the OK button.

The printer will automatically go online.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Length Set, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Specify the roll length as follows.

1.

Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.

2.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.

3.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.

5.



Handling Paper 125

Handling rolls

Feeding Roll Paper Manually

You can bring the printer ofine by pressing the Online button.

When the printer is ofine and roll paper is selected as the paper source, you can advance or retract the roll by pressing ▲ or ▼.

Press ▲ to retract the roll manually.

Press ▼ to advance the roll manually.

If you hold down the ▲ or ▼ button for less than a second, the roll paper will move about 1 mm (0.039 in).

If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second, the paper will move until you release the button. Release the button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more.

126 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper

If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, when the roll is ejected, a barcode with text is printed on the roll paper that identies the type of paper and amount left. If this function is activated and barcodes are printed on the roll paper, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected when you load a roll. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.

Note

•

If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed. This is also the case when printing on 8-inch rolls or clear lm.

Important

•

If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.

Follow these steps to activate detection of the remaining roll paper.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chk Remain.Roll, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.


Handling Paper 127

Handling rolls

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically

If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this case, set Trim Edge First to Automatic or On on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the leading edge to make the edge straight after you load a roll.

Trim Edge First offers the following options.

•

Automatic

If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 3 mm (0.12 in) or more when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge, and scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 3 mm.

•

Off

The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper, by default.

For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

•

On

The leading edge is cut off when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut off from the leading edge varies depending on the paper type. For more information, see the Paper

Reference Guide. (→P.108)

Note

•

If you print on paper that has an irregular width, set Skew Check Lv. to Loose for a higher skew detection threshold or to Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.

Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.

This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.

128 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls

How a roll is cut after ejection varies depending on the printer settings.

Automatic

Cutting Method

The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter

Unit following printer driver settings.

Menu Settings

Cutting

Mode

Automatic

Driver Setting

Auto Cut Yes

Eject

(→P.130)

Eject Yes

Manual

(→P.131)

Choose this setting if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.

To cut the roll using the Cutter Unit , hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Choose this setting when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit .

Cut each page from the roll using scissors.

For continuous printing (if you will cut each page later), in Auto Cut , select Yes , or select Print Cut Guideline .

(→P.421)

Manual No Yes

Print Cut

Guideline

Paper

Cutting

(→P.133)

Choose this option if you want to cut pages by pressing Cutter Unit buttons for manual cutting after printing when the printer driver is congured to Auto Cut > No or Print Cut

Guideline .

Otherwise choose this option if you want to cut the roll edge after loading a roll.

Paper

Cutting

Yes No Print

Cut

Guideline

Note

•

Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have specied Auto Cut > Yes in the printer driver.

•

With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the roll is cut.

Cut rolls manually in the following cases:


Handling Paper 129

Handling rolls

Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)

Important

•

When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, support the documents. If the paper drops, printed documents may be damaged.

•

Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the printing quality.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject, and then press the OK button.

6.

Start printing.

Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.

7.

As you support the printed document to prevent it from dropping, hold down the Stop button for at least a second to cut the roll.

130 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit )

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.

6.

Start printing.

The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.

7.

Press the Online button.

Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.

Handling Paper 131


Handling rolls

8.

Use scissors to cut the roll paper along the cut line.

9.


The roll is rewound, and rewinding stops automatically.

132 Handling Paper


Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specied position)

Handling rolls

1.

If the printer stops operating after printing, press the Online button. The printer goes ofine.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to feed the roll paper to the position for cutting.

3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting, and then press the ► button.

5.


After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.

Caution

•

If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in some cases before cutting.

Handling Paper 133


Handling rolls

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls

The printer is equipped with a function to reduce cutting dust for media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to generate debris when cut. This may improve printing quality and help prevent Printhead damage. You can set up this function to be activated for some types of paper.

When this function is activated, black lines are printed at the leading and trailing edges of documents.

Important

•

Do not activate the function to reduce cutting dust for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or lightweight paper. This may impair cutting and cause paper jams.

•

Borderless printing is not available when this function is activated. Deactivate this function before borderless printing.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct., and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.

The function to reduce cutting dust is now activated.

134 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls

When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during ejection, soiling it. You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.

Windows

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box.

(→P.149)

2.

Select the Main sheet and click

C

Advanced Settings in

A

Media Type.

3.

In the Media Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select

C

Between Pages and

D

Between Scans in

B

Drying Time, and then click OK.

(→P.151)


Handling Paper 135

Handling rolls

Mac OS X

1.


2.

Select the Main pane and click

C

Settings in

A

Media Type.

3.


C


D


B


(→P.152)

136 Handling Paper


Mac OS 9

1.


2.

Select the Main pane and click

D

Settings in

A

Media Type.

Handling rolls

3.


C


D


B


(→P.153)

Note

•

By factory default, Drying Time is deactivated ( Off ) for all paper types.

•

To have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper, set Cutting

Mode to Eject in the printer menu.

(→P.129)

Handling Paper 137


Handling rolls

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel.

Remove the jammed paper as follows.

Note

•

For instructions on removing a paper jam from a roll if the scrap of paper remains in the Paper Feed

Slot, see “Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)”. (→P.142)

1.

Open the Roll Paper Unit Cover. Use a store-bought cutter or the like to cut the paper of the loaded roll.

Caution

•

When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.

2.

Press Load/Eject button.

138 Handling Paper


3.

Remove the jammed paper.

•

If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover

1.

Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side.

Handling rolls

2.

Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

3.


Important

•

Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).


Handling Paper 139

Handling rolls

•

If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot

1.


2.

Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer. If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot (→P.141), remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam.

•

If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide

Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.


4.

Press OK.

140 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

If paper is jammed deep in the Paper Feed Slot, remove the Roll Feed Unit and clear the paper jam as follows.

1.

Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer. (→P.147)

2.



3.

Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again. (→P.148)


Handling Paper 141

Handling rolls

Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)

Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper.

1.

Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Cut Sheet lamp.

2.


A screen is displayed for paper type selection.

3.

Select POP Board and press the OK button.

A screen is displayed for paper size selection.

4.

Select the desired size and press the OK button.

Instructions for feeding POP Board are shown on the Control Panel, but instead of following them, follow this procedure to remove the jammed paper.

5.

Open the Top Cover.

6.

Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Back Cover. Push the scrap out toward the Platen.

7.

Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.

8.

If any scraps remain inside the Paper Feed Slot, repeat steps 6 and 7.

9.


10.

Turn the printer off. (→P.19)

142 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Roll Holder Set

A set of parts including a Roll Holder, Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores), 3-Inch Paper Core

Attachment, and Spacer for Borderless Printing (used for both 2- and 3-inch paper cores).

To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Roll Holder and attach the Holder Stopper for 3-inch paper cores. If you use an A1 (594 mm [23.4 in]) roll or A2 (420 mm [16.5 in]) roll for borderless printing, insert the Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder.

•

Roll Holder Set RH2-24

•

Roll Holder

•

Holder Stopper (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores (a) and (b))

•

3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

•

Spacer for Borderless Printing

For instructions on installing these parts, see “Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder”. (→P.144)


Handling Paper 143

Handling rolls

Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder

Mounting the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

To load a roll with a 3-inch paper core, insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment on the Roll Holder.

Align the triangular part (b) of the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment (a) with the triangular groove (c) of the Roll

Holder as shown, and insert the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment into the Roll Holder.

Removing the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment

Spread the tips (b) of the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment that protrude by the triangular label (a) of the Roll

Holder as shown, and remove the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment.

144 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Attaching the Spacer for Borderless Printing

If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder.

Insert the protrusions (b) of the Spacer for Borderless Printing (a) into the holes (c) of the Roll Holder, as shown.

Important

•

If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, be sure to attach the provided Spacer for Borderless

Printing on the Roll Holder. If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

Removing the Spacer for Borderless Printing

Pull out the Spacer for Borderless Printing from the Roll Holder, as shown.


Handling Paper 145

Handling rolls

Feeding Paper from the Roll Feed Unit

The Paper Feed Slot used to feed roll paper is the same as the Paper Feed Slot used for the Top Paper Feed

Slot, so both methods of feeding paper cannot be used at the same time.

Thus, if a roll has been advanced when you wish to print from the Top Paper Feed Slot or Front Paper Feed

Slot, change the paper source.

1.

Select sheets as the paper source. (→P.154)

2.

After Remove roll? is displayed, press the OK button.

The roll is rewound automatically.

Similarly, if a sheet is in the Top Paper Feed Slot or Front Paper Feed Slot when you wish to print on a roll, you will need to remove the sheet from the slot and reinsert the roll paper (which has been rewound) in the Paper Feed Slot.

1.

Select the roll as the paper source. (→P.115)

2.

After Eject sheet? is displayed, press the OK button.

The sheet is ejected automatically.

146 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Removing the Roll Feed Unit

Important

•

Always make sure the printer is off before removing the Roll Feed Unit.

1.

Remove any rolls in the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.122)

2.

Use a coin or screwdriver to loosen the screws (a) on both sides of the back of the Roll Feed Unit and remove the unit from the printer.

3.

Hold the Roll Feed Unit by the Carrying handles (a) as you remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer.


Handling Paper 147

Handling rolls

Installing the Roll Feed Unit

Important

•

Always make sure the printer is off before attaching the Roll Feed Unit.

1.

Holding the Roll Feed Unit by the Carrying handles (a), insert the two pins of the Roll Feed Unit

(b) into the each hole on the back of the printer (c).

2.

Use a coin or screwdriver to tighten the two screws on the back of the Roll Feed Unit (a) to secure it to the printer.

148 Handling Paper


Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows)

1.

Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

Handling rolls

3.

Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

Note

•

The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver. (→P.462)


Handling Paper 149

Handling rolls

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,

Favorites, Utility, and Support.

Important

•

If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.

•

You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.473)

150 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

•

To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click

Settings by Media Type.

Setting Item Description

A

Media Type

Select the paper type.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper

Reference Guide . (→P.108)

B

Drying Time

Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying

Time setting is only valid for rolls.

(→P.135)

C

Between Pages

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

D

Between Scans

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.

E

Roll Paper Margin for

Safety

F

Near End Margin

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

G

Cut Speed

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H

Calibration Value

You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing.

I

Mirror

Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

Handling Paper 151


Handling rolls

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)


Note

•

To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , click



A

Media Type




B

Drying Time



(→P.135)

C

Between Pages


D

Between Scans


E


Safety

F

Near End Margin



G

Cut Speed


H

Automatic Cutting

You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify Yes , No, or Print Cut Guideline .

I



J

Mirror


152 Handling Paper


Handling rolls

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)


Note

•

To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521) , click



A

Media Type




B

Drying Time



(→P.135)

C

Between Pages


D

Between Scans


E


Safety

F

Near End Margin



G

Cut Speed

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H


You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline .

I

Mirror


Handling Paper 153


Handling sheets for paper feed slots

Handling sheets for paper feed slots

Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source

You can switch the paper source between the roll and the sheet by pressing the Feeder Selection button.

Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll (indicated by the Roll Media

lamp ) and the sheet (indicated by the Cut Sheet lamp ).

Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Cut Sheet lamp (a).

Caution

•

Paper jams may occur if you load paper other than the paper specied in the paper settings for the media source. If you insert the edge of a roll in the Paper Feed Slot after you have selected sheets as the type of paper in the media source on the Control Panel and specied the type and size of paper, the printer will prepare to print on the roll. If you print under these conditions, an error will occur when the roll is ejected. (→P.699)

Note

•

You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:

•

If the Message lamp is ashing

Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.687)

•

If the Data lamp is ashing

Select the paper source after printing.

•

If a printer menu operation is in progress

Select the paper source after the menu operation.

•

When in the process of loading paper

Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.

•

When in the process of replacing Ink Tanks

Finish replacing the Ink Tanks before selecting the paper source.

•

If the Top Cover is open

Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.

154 Handling Paper



Select sheets as the paper source, press the Load/Eject button, and load the sheet. If you want to change the type or size of paper shown on the Control Panel, press the Menu button and change the settings in the Control Panel menus.

(→P.162)

(→P.163)

Note

•

Remove any loaded paper that will not be used. (→P.164)

•

If a roll is loaded, the roll paper is automatically ejected.


Handling Paper 155


Loading Sheets Manually

When using the tray, load the paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot . (→P.156) However, if you have specied

POP Board, insert the sheet in the Front Paper Feed Slot . (→P.158)

Loading paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot

Note

•

You can load only one sheet in the Top Paper Feed Slot. Do not load more than one sheet at a time.

This may cause paper jams.

•

Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight.

•

Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam. If necessary, straighten the paper and reload it.

•

Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error.

•

Before feeding paper or printing, make sure the sheet is at against the Paper Tray Cover . The sheet may jam if it curls before feeding or printing and the trailing edge drops toward the front.

•

If a roll is loaded, rewind the roll before this procedure. (→P.146)

1.

If you send a print job specifying a paper other than POP Board from a computer beforehand, the type and size of paper are shown on the Display Screen. Press the Load/Eject button.

Note

•

If you will load paper before sending a print job, press the Load/Eject button. After a menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button. Next, a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the

Display Screen. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the size of paper, and then press the OK button.

2.

Open the Paper Tray Cover (a), and then open the Tray Extension (b).

156 Handling Paper



3.

Slide the Width Guide (a) to align it with the mark for the size of paper you will load.

4.

Load the paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot with the printing side face-up.

Insert the paper until its edge touches the far end of the tray lightly.

5.

Move the Width Guide (a) to match the size of paper loaded.

Set the Width Guide against the edge of the paper to prevent the paper from becoming crooked or wrinkled.

6.

Press the OK button to start feeding the paper.

After the paper is advanced and the printer goes online, printing starts automatically.

If no print job was received beforehand, the printer enters Standby mode.

Handling Paper 157



Loading heavyweight paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot

Important

•

Before loading heavyweight paper, change the media type setting to POP Board. After POP Board is selected as the type of paper, you can select Front Paper Feed Slot.

•

Always load a POP Board in the Front Paper Feed Slot. Loading it another way may damage the printer or cause malfunction.

Note

•

You can load only one sheet of paper at a time.

•

Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight.

•

If the paper is warped, straighten it before loading it.

•

Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error.

•

After loading the paper, you cannot move it laterally to reposition it. Be sure to load the paper straight.

1.

If you send a print job specifying POP Board from a computer beforehand, the type and size of paper are shown on the Display Screen. Press the Load/Eject button.

Note

•

If you will load heavyweight paper before sending a print job, press the Load/Eject button. After a menu for selection of the type of paper is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to select POP

Board, and then press the OK button. Next, a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the

Display Screen. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the size of paper, and then press the OK button.

2.

If Leave 70cm (28") space behind printer. is displayed, check the space behind the printer, lift the four Front Tray Guides on the Ejection Guide, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

Sufcient space behind the printer is required when loading paper in the Front Paper Feed Slot. For details on the space required for installation, see “Specications”. (→P.72)

158 Handling Paper



3.

Open Upper Cover is displayed. At this point, open the Top Cover.

4.

With the sheet printing-side up, place the leading edge on the Front Tray Guides and insert it straight into the Front Paper Feed Slot.


Handling Paper 159


5.

As you look inside the Top Cover, insert the leading edge of the paper between the Platen and

Paper Retainer (a), keeping it parallel to the Paper Retainer (a), and align the paper with the

Paper Alignment Line (b) of the Front Tray Guides.

Important

•

Never touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage the printer.

160 Handling Paper



6.

Close top cover. is displayed. At this point, close the Top Cover and press the OK button.

The paper is held between the Platen and Back Cover as it is fed.

After the paper is advanced and the printer goes online, printing starts automatically.

If no print job has been received from the computer beforehand, the printer enters Standby mode.

7.

After printing, the printer will temporarily stop advancing the paper while the trailing edge is still in the rollers to prevent the sheet from dropping. Press the Load/Eject button to release the sheet. After pulling it straight out, press the OK button. (→P.165)

8.

Lift the four Front Tray Guides on the Ejection Guide to store them toward the front, and then press the OK button.


Handling Paper 161


Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)

When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.

Note

•

After you press the Feeder Selection button to illuminate the Cut Sheet lamp, press the Load/Eject button to display a screen for selection of the paper type.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button to display a screen for selection of the paper size. (→P.163)

•

If you have sent the print job from a computer beforehand, the screen for paper type and size selection is not displayed. Printing will start after the paper is advanced.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual PaperType, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

Select POP Board when loading heavyweight paper.

•

For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108) Plain Paper is selected by factory default.

•

Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.

5.


162 Handling Paper



Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet)

To change the paper size after paper has been advanced, select the paper size as follows.

Note

•

After you press the Feeder Selection button to illuminate the Cut Sheet lamp, press the Load/Eject button to display a screen for selection of the paper type automatically.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button to display a screen for selection of the paper size. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the paper size, and then press the OK button. The printer is now ready to advance the paper.

•

If you have sent the print job from a computer beforehand, the screen for paper type and size selection is not displayed. Printing will start after the paper is advanced.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual PaperSize, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the size of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

For details on paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)

5.



Handling Paper 163


Removing Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot

Press the Load/Eject button to eject the sheet.

Note

•

Paper cannot be ejected by using the Load/Eject button when print jobs are in progress or during the ink drying period. Before ejecting paper, press the Stop button to cancel printing, print job processing, or ink drying.

The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.

164 Handling Paper



Removing Heavyweight Paper from the Front Paper Feed

Slot

If you are printing heavyweight paper from the Front Paper Feed Slot, the printer will stop advancing the paper while the trailing edge is still in the rollers to prevent the sheet from dropping. In this case, remove the paper as follows.

1.


Note

•

If you load paper from the Front Paper Feed Slot but press the Load/Eject button without printing, the printer will eject the paper and stop advancing it momentarily while the trailing edge is still in the rollers to prevent the sheet from dropping. Press the Load/Eject button again when you are ready to remove the paper.

2.

Pull the sheet straight forward to remove it.

Note

•

If you do not remove POP Board by pulling it straight forward, the printed surface may become scratched.

3.


Caution

•

After removal, press the OK button. If you do not remove the paper before doing subsequent operations, the sheet may go back inside the printer, leaving roller marks across the trailing edge of paper.

Handling Paper 165



Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray

If a sheet loaded manually becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control

Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.

1.

Press Load/Eject.

2.


•


1.

Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side manually.

2.



3.


166 Handling Paper


Important

•



•

If paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot of the Top Paper Feed Slot



•




Handling Paper 167



•

If paper is jammed in the back of the printer

Remove the jammed paper from the back.


3.

Press OK button.


1.

Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer.

(→P.147)

2.



3.

Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again.

(→P.148)

168 Handling Paper


Output Stacker

Using the Output Stacker

The Output Stacker can be held at two positions, as shown.

Output Stacker

•

When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker

Use position (1).

•

When the Output Stacker is not used

Use position (2).

Important

•

When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker, and the printed surface may become soiled.

•

The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.

Handling Paper 169


Output Stacker

Use the Output Stacker in the normal position (a).

However, for some types of media, you can use the stacker in the position for easy removal (b). To switch the stacker to the position for easy removal, move the Support Rod to the position of (b). This position enables printed documents to be removed more easily.

For information on the position for easy removal, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

170 Handling Paper


Output Stacker

Output Stacker Precautions

When you print on rolls, you can use the Output Stacker to hold ejected printouts.

When you use the Output Stacker (b), push down Basket Rod #1 fully toward the front, keeping it even on the left and right so that Basket Rod #2 (a) is not slanted.

The Output Stacker can accommodate one sheet. Remove each sheet before printing if you are printing a series of documents.

Use the Output Stacker in the normal position (a). However, for some types of media, you can use the stacker in the extended position (b). This position enables printed documents to be removed more easily.

For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in the extended position, refer to the Paper



Handling Paper 171

Print quality and color settings

Enhanced Printing Options

Print quality and color settings

Choosing a Paper for Printing

Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.

Media type

The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.

Note

•

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

•

The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. For information about the Media Conguration

Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

•

An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the paper type as specied in the printer driver does not match the type specied on the printer. Although you can print under these conditions, the printing results may not be suitable.

If the paper type is not listed for selection

If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected, try specifying glossy paper or proong paper as a special paper (Special 1 to Special 5, in this order). BK ( Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Try specifying other types of paper as Special 6 to Special 10. MBK ( Matte Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Note that higher numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.

For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.124)

•


172 Enhanced Printing Options



Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.

Advanced Settings

For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and colors to prioritize for printing.

Note

•

Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose the printing application.

For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics.

•

Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.177)

•

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.179)

•

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.181)

•

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) (→P.182)

•

Printing Ofce Documents (→P.183)

Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

Print Priority (*1) Description

Image

A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.

Line Drawing/Text

Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing detailed text in printed documents.

However, the quality may not be sufcient when printing photos or images that require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose “Image” instead.

Ofce Document

Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics, such as documents and presentation material created with typical ofce applications.

*1: Options suitable for the selected paper type are listed under Print Priority.


Enhanced Printing Options 173


Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

Print Quality (*1) Description

Highest

A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing quality.

High

Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important.

Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in

“Standard” or “Draft” modes, but this mode offers exceptional printing quality.

Standard

Draft

Print Priority

Image

Image


Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important.

Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.

Image


Ofce Document

Choose this setting to print faster.

Printing in draft mode can help you work more efciently when checking layouts.

Image


*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.




Color Settings

Setting Item

Color Mode (*1)

Color Adjustment (Images)

Color Adjustment (Graphics)

Color Adjustment (Text)

Gray Adjustment

Color-Matching Modes

Color-Matching Method (*2)

Color Space (*3)

Color

Options

Monochrome (Photo)

Monochrome

Cyan

Magenta

Yellow

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Gray Tone Adjustment

Description

Choose whether to print in color or monochrome.

(→P.184)

You can adjust the levels of cyan, magenta, and yellow as well as the brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray tone separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

If you choose Monochrome in

Color Mode only Brightness and

Contrast can be adjusted.

Color Balance

Brightness

Contrast

Highlight

Shadow

Driver Matching Mode

ICC Matching Mode

Off

Choose the gray tone color balance

( Cool Black or Warm Black ) and adjust levels of brightness, contrast, highlight, and shadow as desired.

These levels can be adjusted when

Monochrome (Photo) is selected in Color Mode .

Choose the color-matching mode.

Other color-matching modes may be provided by the computer operating system, such as ICM and ColorSync.

Auto

Perceptual

Perceptual (People, Dark Areas)

Saturation

Colorimetric

Others

Choose the color-matching method. The available options vary depending on your selection in “Color-Matching Mode.”

sRGB

Adobe RGB

Choose a standard color space

( sRGB ) or an expanded color space ( Adobe RGB ).

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.

*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.

*3: Adobe RGB is not available if an incompatible combination of the paper type and print quality is selected.




Enhancing Printing Quality

Setting Item

Thicken Fine Lines (*1)

Unidirectional Printing

High-Precision Printing

Description

Choose this option to make ne lines clearer in CAD drawings or similar documents.

Choosing unidirectional printing can improve printing results if lines are printed crooked or images are uneven. However, it takes more time than regular printing.

Enables printing at the highest level of quality.

However, this requires more time than usual for printing.

*1: Displayed in Windows and Mac OS 9.

Note

•

To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.

•

For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.190)

•

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (→P.192)

•

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS 9) (→P.195)




Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.

Easy Settings

Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for photos and images

Print Target

Highest Quality

Description

Setting optimized for printing at the highest level of quality.

Draft Setting optimized for high-speed draft printing.

Photo (Photo Studio)

Photo (Standard)

Photo (Adobe RGB)

Photo (Monochrome)

Poster (Photos)

For printing with an effect similar to that produced by photo studios. In subdued, dark photos, images of people and dark scenes are printed attractively.

Setting optimized for printing photographic images from digital cameras.

Setting optimized for printing in colors matching those of images created using the Adobe RGB color space.

Setting optimized for printing monochrome photos in the neutral black image tone of conventional lm photographs.

Suitable for printing posters composed mainly of photographs.




Print Target

Poster (Text, Illustrations)

Scanned Image

Description

Setting optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching store posters combining images and text.

Setting optimized for printing scanned images with accurate color reproduction to match the original images.

Caution

•

Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

Note

•

You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.

•

You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)

For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing”. (→P.173)

•

For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.228)

•

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.230)




Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.

Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for photos and images

Print Target

Highest Quality

Description

Settings optimized for printing at the highest level of quality.

Photos (High Image Quality) Setting optimized for printing photographic images at a higher level of quality.

Photo (from digital camera)

Photo (Monochrome)

Adobe RGB Images

Poster (Graphic Image)

POP Ad

Settings optimized for printing photographic images from digital cameras.

Setting optimized for printing monochrome photos in the neutral black image tone of conventional lm photographs.

Settings optimized for printing in colors matching those of images created using the Adobe RGB color space.

Settings optimized for printing posters mainly composed of photos and images.

Settings optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching store posters combining images and text.




Scanned Image

Print Target

Draft

Description

Settings optimized for printing scanned images with accurate color reproduction to match the original images.

Settings optimized for high-speed draft printing.

Caution

•


Note

•


•



•

For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•





Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X)

Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.

Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for line drawings and text

Print Target

Poster (Notice Announcement)

Description

Settings optimized for printing announcements such as wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text.

3D CAD, GIS Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.

CAD (Line Drawing) Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.

Note

•


•



For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.215)

•

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.217)




Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)


Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for line drawings and text

Print Target

Poster (Notice Announcement)

Description

Settings optimized for printing announcements such as wall newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text.

3D-CAD/GIS Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings, perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS maps.

CAD (Line Drawing) Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD drawings clearly.

Note

•


•



For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•





Printing Ofce Documents


Easy Settings


Print Target


Print targets for ofce documents

Print Target

Ofce Document

Description

Settings optimized for clear printing of ofce documents such as handouts.

Note

•


•



For instructions on printing ofce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) (→P.222)

•

Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) (→P.224)

•

Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS 9) (→P.226)




Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver

Color settings specied in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.

Color Mode

Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.

The available options vary depending on the color mode.

Color Mode

Description

Color

Print in color.

Monochrome (Photo) Grayscale printing optimized for monochrome photos.

Monochrome

Print in grayscale.

Color Adjustment

You can adjust the color balance and color-matching method.

You can adjust the color balance in ways tailored to monochrome photos.

You can adjust the color balance.

Color Adjustment

You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

Adjustment Item Description

Cyan

Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan

, Magenta , and Yellow .

Magenta

Yellow

Brightness

Contrast

Saturation

Gray Tone Adjustment (Gray Tone)

Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.

For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.

Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from subdued to vivid.

Adjust the grayscale, in a range from cool, blue tones to warm, red tones.




Matching

You can choose the color-matching mode and method.

By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of on-screen images more closely.

Matching Mode Description

Notes

Driver Matching Mode

Color adjustment based on the original color prole of the printer driver

This is the default color-matching method. Normally, use Driver

Matching Mode .

ICC Matching Mode

You can select the printer prole in the Printer Prole Settings list.

Driver ICM Mode

Host ICM Mode

ColorSync

Off (No Correction)

Color adjustment based on ICC color proles (an international standard) using the printer driver

Color adjustment based on the standard Windows ICM function.

The printer driver adjusts the colors.

Color adjustment based on the standard Windows ICM function.

Windows adjusts the colors.

Color adjustment based on the standard Mac OS ColorSync function. Mac OS adjusts the colors.

No color-matching

Available when using Windows

2000, Windows XP, or Windows

Server 2003/Windows Vista

Available when using the Mac OS

Choose this option for color-matching by the software application or with your own color prole, when you want to disable color-matching by the printer driver.




Auto

Matching Method Description

Color-matching optimized for images, graphics, or text

Perceptual

Perceptual (People, Dark Areas)

Color matching optimized for printing skin tone and dark areas attractively in subdued, dark photos. For printing indoor shots of people or evening scenes attractively.

Colorimetric

Color-matching optimized for photos. Print images with smooth gradations and colors closer to those as displayed on the screen.

Color-matching with adjustment to remove color from white area.

Without white adjustment, colors are added to white area.

Colorimetric (No Wht-pnt Corr)

Color-matching without white adjustment to reect the prole of original data. Without white adjustment, colors are added to white area.

Saturation

Color-matching optimized for graphics. This option emphasizes color saturation.

Notes

The available options and their display order varies depending on your selection in Color-Matching

Mode, as well as the operating system.





The following settings can be adjusted if “Monochrome (Photo)” is selected in Color Mode.

Gray Adjustment

Items

Description

Color Balance

Enables you to adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos.

Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on.

Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.

Brightness

Contrast

Highlight

Shadow




Adjust levels of image highlight areas.

Adjust levels of image shadow areas.

Note

•

Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.

For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.198)

•

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.201)

•

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.204)




Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing

Environment

You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.

There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing

On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing.

Important

•

This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.

•

You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.

•

This function is only supported in Windows.

For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:

•

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing (Windows) (→P.604)

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light

Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.

Important

•

This function requires the Eye-One spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed.

•

You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.

•

For a list of supported Eye-One devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure

Tool.

•


For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:

•

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (→P.608)




Printing Photos in Monochrome

The following settings are available for monochrome printing.

Main Easy

Settings

Print

Target

Photo

(Monochrome)

A mode optimized for printing monochrome images with maximum expressiveness through simple operations.

Choosing Photo (Monochrome) in Easy Settings applies image processing to keep color ink use to an absolute minimum, suppressing color shift and achieving consistent gray balance.

•

Photo (Monochrome) is not available for all types of paper.

•

Printing that matches the pure neutral black of conventional photos (silver-halide prints) is possible.

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows) (→P.236)

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.238)

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9) (→P.241)

Advanced

Settings

Color

Mode

Monochrome

(Photo)

A mode for printing monochrome images with maximum expressiveness by specifying detailed settings. In these settings, you can specify to apply image processing to keep color ink use to an absolute minimum, suppress color shift, and achieve consistent gray balance. You can also ne-tune the color balance by selecting “Warm Black,” “Cool Black”, and so on.

•

Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the Color

Adjustment sheet.

•

Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.

Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos

(Windows) (→P.207)


(Mac OS X) (→P.209)


(Mac OS 9) (→P.212)

Monochrome

Deactivates color printing so that images are printed in monochrome, with continuous-tone color data printed using gray midtones. Use this mode to print ofce documents or graphics in monochrome, or if the paper is not compatible with the Monochrome (Photo) setting.

•

Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the Color

Adjustment sheet.

•

If the paper is not compatible with the Monochrome

(Photo) setting, choose Monochrome .

•

Because color ink is used to produce gray continuous-tone images, the gray may appear to have a tinge of color.


(Windows) (→P.207)


(Mac OS X) (→P.209)


(Mac OS 9) (→P.212)




Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions

(Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to print CAD drawings in monochrome.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.

Click

D

Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

6.

Click Line Drawing/Text in the

E

Print Priority list.

7.

Click Standard (600dpi) in the

F

Print Quality list.

Note

•

Options displayed in the

F

Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.




8.

Click Monochrome in the

G

Color Mode list.

9.

To adjust the brightness and contrast, click

H

Color Settings.

Note

•

For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”.

(→P.184)

10.


11.

Conrm the settings of

A

Page Size,

L

Media Source, and so on.

12.

Conrm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

•

For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.443)





(Mac OS X)


1.


2.


B


3.


C


4.

Click

F


5.

In the application menu, choose Print.

6.


7.

In the

A




8.

Click

D



9.

Click Line Drawing in the

E


10.

Click Standard(600dpi) in the

F


Note

•


F


11.


H


12.

To adjust the brightness and contrast, click

I

Set.

Note

•


(→P.184)

13.





14.


A

Media Source and

C

Page Size.

15.

Conrm the print settings, and then click

M

Print to start printing.

Note

•

For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.493)





(Mac OS 9)


1.


2.


3.


A

Page Size list.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C





8.

Click

E


9.

Click Line Drawing in the

F


10.

Click Standard(600dpi) in the

G


Note

•


G


11.


H


12.

To adjust brightness and contrast, click

I

Set.

Note

•


(→P.184)

13.





14.

Conrm the selection in

A

Media Source.

15.


N


Note

•

For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.518)




Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.

Click

D


6.

Click Color in the

G




7.

Click

H

Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.


8.

On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

Adjustment Item

Description

C

Cyan

Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan ,

Magenta , and Yellow .

D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness


G

Contrast

H

Saturation




I


Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.

9.

Close the Color Settings dialog box.




10.


11.


A

Page Size,

L


12.


Note

•

For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.443)




Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


1.


2.


B


3.


C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A





8.

Click

D


9.


H


10.

Click

I

Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.




11.

On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.


C

Cyan



D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness


G

Contrast



H

Saturation

I

Gray Tone



12.

Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.

13.


14.


A


C

Page Size.

15.


M


Note

•

For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.493)




Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)


1.


2.


3.


A

Page Size list.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C




8.

Click

E



9.


H


10.

Click

I

Set to display the Color Settingsdialog box.




11.

On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.


C

Cyan



D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness


G

Contrast



H

Saturation

I

Gray Tone



12.


13.


14.


A

Media Source.

15.


N


Note

•





Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos

(Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to

ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.

Click

D


6.

Click Monochrome (Photo) in the

G


Note

•

Monochrome (Photo) may not be available for all types of paper.




7.

Click

H


8.

On the Gray Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

9.

Close the Color Settings dialog box.

10.


11.


A

Page Size,

L


12.


Note

•






(Mac OS X)



1.


2.

Select the print target in the

B


3.


C


4.

Click

F


5.

In the source application menu, choose Print.

6.


7.

In the

A





8.

Click

D


9.


H


Note

•


10.

Click

I


11.

On the Gray Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

12.




13.



14.


A


C

Page Size.

15.


M


Note

•






(Mac OS 9)



1.


2.


3.


A

Page Size list.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C




8.

Click

E



9.


H


Note

•


10.

Click

I


11.

On the Gray Tone Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.




12.


13.


A

Media Source.

14.


N


Note

•





Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.

•

Document: CAD drawing

•

Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•

Paper type: Plain Paper

•

Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.


2.

Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.473)

3.


4.

In the

A

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5.

After conrming that

D

Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the

E

Print

Target list.

Note

•

You can check the settings values selected in the

E

Print Target list by clicking

F

View Settings.




6.


7.

In

A

Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A3.

8.

Click Roll Paper in the

L

Media Source list.

9.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the

M

Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll

(420.0mm).

10.

Specify additional printing conditions.


11.


Note

•





Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)


•


•

Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.

Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.

2.


B


3.

In the

C

Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.

4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A





8.


D


E

Print

Target list.

Note

•


E


F

View set..

9.


10.


A


11.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the

B

Roll Paper Width list-in this case,

ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•

If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in

B


L

Printer Information on the Main pane and update the printer information.




12.

Make sure

C

Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in

C

Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.

13.



14.


M


Note

•







•


•

Page Size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•

Paper: Sheets ( Manual )

•


•

Paper size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

1.


2.


3.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C





8.


E


F

Print

Target list.

Note

•


F


G

View set.

9.


10.

Click Manual in the

A


11.



12.


N


Note

•





Printing Ofce Documents (Windows)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.

•

Document: Ofce document created using word-processing software or spreadsheet programs

•

Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

•

Paper: Sheets

•


•

Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


D

Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the

E

Print

Target list.

Note

•


E


F

View Settings.



6.

Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setupsheet.


7.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

8.


L


9.



10.


Caution

•


Note

•





Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X)


•

Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs

•


•

Paper: Sheets

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A





8.


D


E

Print

Target list.

Note

•


E


F

View set.

9.


10.

Click Sheets in the

A


11.

Make sure

C

Page Size shows the original size as specied in

C

Paper Size in the Page

Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

12.



13.


M


Note

•





Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS 9)


•

Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs

•


•


•


•


1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C





8.


E


F

Print Target

list.

Note

•


F


G

View set.

9.


10.


A


11.



12.


N


Note

•





Printing Photos and Images (Windows)

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

•

Document: Photo image from a digital camera

•

Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

•

Paper: Roll

•

Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper

•

Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy

Photo Paper.

In the

A

Media Type, choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated

Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

•

The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)

5.


D

Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) or Photo (Photo

Studio) in the

E

Print Target list.

Note

•

For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and

Images (Windows, Mac OS X)”. (→P.177)

•


E


F

View Settings.



6.



7.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".

8.


L


9.


M

Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.

Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.

10.



11.


Note

•





Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)


•


•

Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

•

Paper: Roll

•

Paper Type: Glossy Photo Paper

•

Roll paper Width: 10 inches (254 mm)

1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C

Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".

4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A


Photo Paper.

Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

•

The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).




8.


D

Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) or Photo (Photo

Studio) in the

E


Note

•

For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and

Images (Windows, Mac OS X)”. (→P.177)

•


E


F

View set.

9.


10.


A


11.


B

Roll Paper Width list in this case, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.

Make sure

C


C

Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

13.



14.


M


Note

•





Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)


•


•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0mm)

1.


2.


3.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".

4.

Click

I


5.


6.





7.

In the

C


Photo Paper.

In the

C

Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,

Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

•

The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool

Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

8.


E

Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (from digital camera) in the

F


Note

•


F


G

View set.

9.


10.


A





11.


B

Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L

Printer on the Main pane and update the printer information.

12.



13.


N


Note

•





Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows)

This topic describes how to print photos in monochrome based on the following example.

•

Original: Photo image from a digital camera

•

Page size: 10×12 inches

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


Photo Paper.

In the

A



Note

•






5.


D

Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the

E

Print

Target list.

Caution

•

Photo (Monochrome) may not be available for all types of paper.

Note

•


E


F

View Settings.

6.


7.

In the

A


8.


L


9.


M

Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.

Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.

10.



11.


Note

•





Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)


•


•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.





7.

In the

A


Photo Paper.

In the

A



Note

•



8.


D


E

Print

Target list.

Caution

•


Note

•


E


F

View set.

9.


10.


A





11.


B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L

Printer


12.

Make sure

C


C

Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

13.



14.


M


Note

•





Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9)


•


•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.





7.

In the

C


Photo Paper.

In the

C



Note

•



8.


E


F

Print

Target list.

Caution

•


Note

•


F


G

View set.

9.


10.


A





11.


B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L

Printer on the

Main pane to update the printer information.

12.



13.


N


Note

•




Printing enlargements or reductions

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Fit Media Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.269)

•

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.271)

•

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.274)

Note

•

For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of

150 dpi or more at actual size.




Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width




Fit Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.261)

•

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.263)

•

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9) (→P.266)

Note

•






Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value




Scaling

Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.

For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) (→P.252)

•

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) (→P.254)

•

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS 9) (→P.257)

Note

•






Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER

Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.

For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the following topic.

•

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.248)

•

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.250)




Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)


Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.

This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.

To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.

1.

Register a hot folder on your computer

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy.

2.

Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.

After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.

Registering a hot folder on your computer

Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.

1.

Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.149)

2.

Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.

3.

Click

B

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy utility.

4.

Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.




Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the

Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

Scanning the original and print an enlargement

Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.

For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

1.

Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.

2.

Press Send to display the screen for transmission.

3.

Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.

4.

Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.

Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specied for the folder.

Note

•

For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement

Copy Guide .




Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)


Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically enlarged according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.



1.

Register a hot folder on your computer.


2.







1.

To display the GARO ExtraKit dialog box, either double-click the GARO ExtraKit icon after navigating to Applications - Canon Utilities - imagePROGRAF, or click

C

Set on the Utility pane.

2.

In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the GARO

ExtraKit utility.






Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.




1.


2.


3.


4.



Note

•


Copy Guide .




Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll paperr width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

Important

•

In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


E


6.





7.


L


8.


M


(420.0mm).

9.

In the

A


10.

Select the

C

Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11.

Click ISO A4 in the

G

Media Size list.

12.

Click

F

Scaling and enter “120.”

Note

•

You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of the paper will not be printed.

•

If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting

G

Print Centered

on the Layout sheet.

13.


Note

•





Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS

X)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


Important

•


1.


2.


B


3.

In

C

Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4.

Click

F


5.


6.





7.

In the

A


8.


E


9.


10.


A


11.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.

Make sure the

C

Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in

C

Paper Size in the

Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

13.

Select the

D


14.

Click

G


Note

•


•

If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the

J

Print Centered

check box.

15.


M


Note

•





Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS

9)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


Important

•


1.


2.


3.

In

A

Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.





7.

In the

C


8.


F


9.


10.


A


11.


B

Roll Paper Width list-here, ISO

A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L




12.



13.

Make sure the

B


A

Page Size in the


14.

Select the

C





15.

Click

F


Note

•


•

If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting

F

Print Centered on the Finishing pane.

16.

Conrm the print settings, and click

N


Note

•





Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.

Select the printing application in the

E


6.





7.


L


8.

In the

A


9.

Select the

C


Note

•

If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B

Borderless Printing check box.

10.

Click

E

Fit Roll Paper Width.

Note

•

After you click

E

Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.

•

Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.

11.


Note

•





Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.





7.

In the

A


8.


E


9.


10.


A


11.


B


in. (406.4mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.

Make sure the

C


C



13.

Select the

D


14.

Click

F


15.


M


Note

•





Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll paper width, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.





7.

In the

C


8.


F


9.


10.


A


11.


B


in. (406.4mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.


13.

Make sure the

B


A



14.

Select the

C


15.

Click

E


16.


N


Note

•





Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any Type

•

Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


E


6.





7.


L


8.


M


(420.0mm).

9.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.

10.

Select the

C


11.

Select the

D

Fit Media Size check box.

12.


G


13.


Note

•





Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)


•

Document: Any Type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.





7.

In the

A


8.


E


9.


10.


A


11.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.

Make sure the

C


C



13.

Select the

D


14.

Make sure

E

Fit Media Size is selected.

15.


I


16.


M


Note

•





Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9)


•

Document: Any Type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.





7.

In the

C


8.


F


9.


10.


A


11.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.


13.

Make sure the

B


A



14.

Select the

C


15.

Make sure

D

Fit Media Size is selected.

16.


H


17.


N


Note

•




Printing at full size

Printing at full size

Printing on Oversized Paper

Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the space for a margin. (→P.78) To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size, use an oversized paper size.

For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and cut away the excess margin.

Note

•

If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image near the edge will not be printed.

Oversize

The margin required by the printer is added around the “outside” of a regular paper size. For example, when printing a A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.

a. Regular paper size: Gray area not printed b. Page Size c. Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)

Important

•

When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin required by the printer.

•

Sheets: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 26 mm (1 in) higher than the page size

•

Rolls: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm (0.24 in) higher than the page size

•

Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized printing. (→P.113)




Note

•

Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows. For oversized printing on sheets, choose Manual as the media source.

•

To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and print on it.

•

To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Media

Size. Oversized printing is not available with “Custom Size.” (→P.331)

For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing at Full Size (Windows) (→P.290)

•

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (→P.292)

•

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.295)




Borderless Printing at Actual Size

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

Important

•

Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

•

Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper


•

If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll Holder. (→P.144)

If you do not attach the Spacer for Borderless Printing, the Platen may be soiled from borderless printing.

•

Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only.

•

These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

•

You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.

•

When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.

•

By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.

1.

On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.

2.

Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.




Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

•

Not all page sizes are available.

•

Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.281)

•

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.283)

•

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.286)




Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.

If you use an A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the

Roll Holder. (→P.144)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•

Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

•


1.

Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8

mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)

Note

•

If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

•

The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.


3.


4.


5.

In the

A

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight

Coated Paper.

6.


E





7.


8.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.

In this case, click 10"x12".

9.


L


10.

Select the

B

Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll

(254.0mm).

12.

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13.

In

C

Borderless Printing Method, click

F

Print Image with Actual Size.

14.


Note

•





Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)




The platen may be soiled from borderless printing if you do not attach it.

•

Document: Any type

•

Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C

Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click

10"x12" - Borderless.

Note

•

Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”

4.

Click

F


5.

In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

6.


7.





8.

In the

A


Coated Paper.

9.


E


10.


11.


A


12.

Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.


B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





13.

Make sure the

C


C


Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.

14.


M


Note

•





Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9)





•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.


2.


3.

In

D

Print Area Setting, click

H

For Broderless Printing.

4.

In the

A

Page Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click


Note

•


5.

Click

I


6.


7.




8.



9.

In the

C


Coated Paper.

10.


F


11.


12.


A





13.



B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


14.





15.

Make sure the

B


A


Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

16.


N


Note

•





Printing at Full Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)

•

Document: Any Type

•

Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


6.

Click

O

Size Options to display the Media Size Options dialog box.

7.

In the Media Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.

8.

Click OK to close the Media Size Options dialog box.




9.

Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the

A

Page Size list.

10.


L


11.


M


(420.0mm).

12.


Note

•


Note

•

You can select Oversize in Display Series to make all oversized versions of paper in the selected

Display Series available for printing. These sizes are displayed in the Page Size list in the format

Oversize - xxxxxx.




Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In

C

Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.

Note

•

For oversized printing, choose paper identied by the regular paper name followed by “- Oversize.”

4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A


8.


E





9.


10.


A


11.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.

Make sure

C


C


Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize.

13.


M


Note

•





Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

D


G

For printing oversizes.

4.

In the

A


5.

Click

I


6.


7.


8.

In the

C


9.


F





10.


11.


A


12.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


13.


N


Note

•




Borderless Printing


Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size




Important

•


•



•



•


•


•


•


•


1.


2.






Borderless Printing

Fit Media Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

Note

•

The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.321)

•

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.323)

•

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.326)



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll

Width




Important

•


•



•



•


•


•


•


•


1.


2.






Borderless Printing

Scale to t Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.

Note

•

You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width

(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.312)

•

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.314)

•

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9) (→P.317)



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size




Important

•


•



•



•


•


•


•


•


1.


2.






Borderless Printing

Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

•

Not all page sizes are available.

•

Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.


•

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.281)

•

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.283)

•

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.286)



Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)





•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.

Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8

mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)

Note

•


•

The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.


3.


4.


5.

In the

A


Coated Paper.

6.


E




Borderless Printing

7.


8.

In the

A



9.


L


10.

Select the

B


11.


(254.0mm).

12.


13.

In

C


F

Print Image with Actual Size.

14.


Note

•




Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)




The platen may be soiled from borderless printing if you do not attach it.

•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C

Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click


Note

•


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.




Borderless Printing

8.

In the

A


Coated Paper.

9.


E


10.


11.


A


12.



B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L




Borderless Printing

13.

Make sure the

C


C


Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.

14.


M


Note

•




Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9)





•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

D


H

For Broderless Printing.

4.

In the

A

Page Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click


Note

•


5.

Click

I


6.


7.




8.


Borderless Printing

9.

In the

C


Coated Paper.

10.


F


11.


12.


A




Borderless Printing

13.



B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


14.




Borderless Printing

15.

Make sure the

B


A



16.


N


Note

•




Borderless Printing


Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

If you use n A1 or A2 roll for borderless printing, insert the provided Spacer for Borderless Printing on the Roll

Holder. (→P.144)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


Note

•


2.


3.


4.


5.

In the

A


Coated Paper.

6.


E




7.


Borderless Printing

8.

In the

A


9.


L


10.

Select the

B


11.


(254.0mm).

12.


13.

In

C

Borderless Printing Method, make sure

E

Scale to t Roll Paper Width is selected.

14.


Note

•




Borderless Printing


Width (Mac OS X)





•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In

C


Note

•

All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.

4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.




Borderless Printing

8.

In the

A


Coated Paper.

9.


E


10.


11.


A


12.


B

Roll Paper Width list-here, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L




Borderless Printing

13.

Make sure the

C


C



14.

Select the

D


15.

Select the

H


This ensures that

F

Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in

D

Enlarged/Reduced

Printing.

16.


M


Note

•




Borderless Printing


Width (Mac OS 9)





•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

A


Note

•

All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.




Borderless Printing

7.


8.

In the

C


Coated Paper.

9.


F


10.


11.


A




Borderless Printing

12.


B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


13.




Borderless Printing

14.

Make sure the

B


A



15.

Select the

C


16.

Select the

G


This ensures that

E

Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in

C

Enlarged/Reduced

Printing.

17.


N


Note

•




Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the

Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.




•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


Note

•


2.


3.


4.


5.

In the

A


Coated Paper.

6.


E




Borderless Printing

7.


8.

In the

A


9.


L


10.

Select the

B


11.


(254.0mm).

12.


13.

In

C


D

Fit Media Size.

14.

Click Match Page Size in the

G


15.


Note

•




Borderless Printing


Paper Size (Mac OS X)





•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C


Note

•

All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.

4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.




Borderless Printing

8.

In the

A


Coated Paper.

9.


E


10.


11.


A


12.


B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L




Borderless Printing

13.

Make sure the

C


C



14.

Select the

D


15.

Select the

H


16.

Click

E

Fit Media Size under

D

Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

17.

In

I

Media Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.

18.


M


Note

•




Borderless Printing


Paper Size (Mac OS 9)





•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In the

A


Note

•

All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.




7.


Borderless Printing

8.

In the

C


Coated Paper.

9.


F


10.


11.


A




Borderless Printing

12.


B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


13.




Borderless Printing

14.

Make sure the

B


A



15.

Select the

C


16.

Select the

G


17.

Click

D

Fit Media Size under

C

Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

18.

In

H

Media Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.

19.


N


Note

•




Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format

Printing)

You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.

Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ll the width of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.


You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to t the full width of rolls.

Note

•

The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd (when printing in Mac OS X).

For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (→P.341)

•

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (→P.345)

•

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS 9) (→P.348)

Important

•

Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.

•

If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.

•

To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.




Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.

There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver

After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose them anytime as needed.

Note

•

These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Media Size in

Windows and Mac OS 9. In Mac OS X, they are called “Custom Sizes.”

Specifying custom media sizes for temporary use

Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver.

Note

•

These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called “Custom Sizes” in Windows.

For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (→P.332)

•

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (→P.336)

•

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS 9) (→P.338)




Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)

This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.

•

Printing by using Custom Size (→P.332)

•

Printing by using Custom Media Size (→P.334)

Printing by using Custom Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.

•

Document: Scanned image

•

Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])

•


•


•

Paper size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])

1.

Load the square paper (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in]) in the Top Paper Feed Slot.

2.

Choose Print in the source application menu.

3.


4.


5.

In the

A


6.


D

Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the

E

Print Target

list.




7.


8.


L


9.

Click Custom Size in the

A

Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

10.

Complete the following settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

1.

Select mm or inch in Units.

2.

Enter “430” [16.9 in] in both Width and Height.

11.

Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

12.


Note

•





Printing by using Custom Media Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Media Size based on the following example. First, register a non-standard paper size called “430 mm Square” as a Custom Media Size.

•


•

Page size: A square sheet (430×430 mm [16.9×16.9 in])

•


•


•


1.


2.

Choose Print in the source application menu.

3.


4.


5.

In the

A


6.


D


E

Print Target

list.




7.


8.

Click

O


9.

Complete the following settings in the Media Size Options dialog box.

1.

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Media Size Name. “430 mm Square” is used in this example.

2.

Select mm or inch in Units.

3.

Enter “430” [16.9 in] in both Width and Height.

Note

•

If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either

Width or Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.

10.

Click Add to register “430 mm Square.”

11.


12.


L


13.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size you added, "430 mm Square."

14.


Note

•





Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print after registering “Custom Media Size” based on the following example. Here, you will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in “Custom Media Size”.

•


•


•


•


•


Note

•

The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.

Create the document in the application.

2.


3.


4.


B


5.

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the

C

Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

6.

In Page Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “43.00 cm” in Height and

Width.

7.

In Printer Margins, enter “0.3” for the top and side margins and “2.3” for the bottom margin.

Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

8.

Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name-in this case, “430*430”.

9.

Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

10.

In the

C

Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size you registered.

11.

Click

F


12.




13.



14.

In the

A


15.


D


E

Print Target

list.

16.


17.


A


18.

In

D

Easy Settings, make sure “430*430” is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.

19.


M


Note

•





Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to print using Custom Media Size based on the following example. Here, you will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in Custom Media Size.

•


•


•


•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Media Design in the Page Attribute list to display the Media Design pane.

6.

Enter a paper name of your choice in

B

Custom Name. “430*430” is used in this example.

7.

In

F

Media Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “430” in

H

Hght and

G

Wid..

8.

Click

J

Add to add the paper size named “430*430”.



9.

Access the Page Attribute dialog box.


10.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size you registered.

11.

In

D


F

For Manual printing.

12.

Click

I


13.


14.


15.

In the

C


16.


E


F





17.


18.


A


19.


N


Note

•






Printing; Windows)

This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

•

Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word

•

Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)

Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.

Register a Custom Media Size.

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Media Size. In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.

2.

In the application, create an original in the size you registered.

3.

Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Registering a Custom Media Size

This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.


2.


3.


L


4.

Click

O


5.

Enter a desired paper name in Custom Media Size Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used in this example.

6.

In Units, click mm.

7.

Under Media Size, enter “100” in Width and “500” in Height.

8.

Click Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”

9.





10.

Close the printer driver dialog box.

Note

•

You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not available after you exit the application.

For more information, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)”. (→P.332)

Creating the banner in the application

Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Media Size you registered.

1.

Start Microsoft Word.

2.

Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.

3.

Under Paper Size, click the Custom Media Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this example.

Important

•

If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.

•

In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes, use the custom paper size setting in “Custom” and specify 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in)

4.

Set the printing orientation to horizontal

5.

Create the banner.

Printing the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.

Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.

2.


3.





4.

In the

A


5.


D

Easy Settings is selected, click POP Ad in the

E


6.


7.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size you registered, "My Horizontal Banner."

8.

Select the

C


Note

•

If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B





9.


L


10.

After you click

E

Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.

11.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll

(406.4mm), and then click OK.

12.


Note

•


Note

•

If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.

1.

On the Layout sheet, click

M

Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.

2.

In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.





Printing; Mac OS X)


•

Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner

•

Page Size: Non-standard (100×500 mm [3.9×19.7 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.

In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2.

Register a “Custom Page Size.”

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a “Custom Page Size” in Page Setup. In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.

3.


Note

•

The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

Register a Custom Page Size

This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.


2.


3.


B


4.

Click Manage Custom Sizes in the

C

Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

5.

Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want to register. Here, enter “100*500.”

If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.

6.

Under Page Size, enter “10” in Width and “50” in Height. Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

7.

Specify the margins by entering “0.3” in Printer Margins. Here, too, measurements are entered in centimeters.




8.

Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

9.

In the

C

Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500", the size you registered.

10.

In

D

Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

11.

Click

F


Print the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.


D

Easy Settings is selected, click POP in the

E


5.





6.


A


7.


B


in. (406.4mm).

Note

•


B


L


8.

In

C

Page Size, make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.

9.

Select the

D


10.

Click

F


11.


M


Note

•






Printing; Mac OS 9)


•

Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner

•

Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm, [3.9×19.7 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


The steps to print a vertical or horizontal banner are as follows.

1.

In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2.

Register a Custom Media Size in Media Design.

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Media Size. In this example, 100×500 mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.

3.


Register a Custom Media Size

This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Click Media Design in the Page Attribute list to display the Media Design pane.




5.

Enter a desired paper name in

B

Custom Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used in this example.

6.

In

C

Units, click

D

mm.

7.

Under

F

Media Size, enter “100” in

G

Wid. and “500” in

H

Hght.

8.

Click

J

Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”

9.

Access the Page Attribute dialog box.

10.

In the

A

Page Size list, click the size you added, “My Horizontal Banner.”

11.

In

B


12.

Click

I





Print the banner

Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1.


2.


3.

In the

C


4.


E

Easy Settings is selected, click POP in the

F


5.





6.


A


7.


B


in. (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


8.


9.

In

B

Page Size, make sure “My Horizontal Banner” is displayed, as registered in Media Design.

10.

Select the

C


11.

Click

E


12.


N


Note

•




Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.

Free Layout (Windows)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.




imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.

Important

•

The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.

For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.

•

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (→P.361)

•

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (→P.363)




Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Roll paper (banner)

Important

•

This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

•

During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.


•

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (→P.365)

•

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (→P.366)

•

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS 9) (→P.368)




Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet

To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.

Page Layout

Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.

Note

•

You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.

•

You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.

Important

•

This function cannot be combined with the following options.

•

Borderless Printing

•

Scaling Originals (Windows)

•

Banner Printing (Windows)

For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (→P.370)

•

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (→P.372)

•

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9) (→P.375)




Printing Posters in Sections

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.

Page Layout

Choose poster printing.

For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Large Posters (Windows) (→P.357)

•

Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9) (→P.359)

Note

•

This method of poster printing is supported in Windows and Mac OS 9.




Printing Large Posters (Windows)

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.

•

Document: Poster

•

Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

•


•

Paper Type: Glossy Paper

•

Paper size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy Paper.

5.

Click Poster (Graphic Image) in the

E


6.





7.

In

A

Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click

ISO A2.

8.


L


9.

Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

10.

Select the

A

Page Layout check box.

11.

Click Poster (2 x 2) in the

B

Page Layout list.

Note

•

Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.

1.

Click

C

Set under

B

Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.

2.

On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.

3.

Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.

12.


Note

•





Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9)

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing on four sheets of paper based on the following example.

•

Document: Poster

•

Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

•


•

Paper type: Glossy Paper

•

Paper size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.

In

D


F

For Manual printing.

5.

Click

I


6.


7.





8.

In the

C

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy Paper.

9.


E

Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Graphic Image) in the

F

Print

Target list.

10.


11.

Select the

I


12.

Click Poster (2 x 2) in the

I


13.

In the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of any portion you do not want to print.

14.


15.

Click Paper Tray Feed in the

A


16.


N


Note

•





Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)

This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Select the

A


6.

Click Free Layout in the

B





7.

When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8.

Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Important

•

Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

•

For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.

9.

Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

•

For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout Guide .




Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before printing.

1.


2.

Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout.

3.

The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.




4.

Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Important

•

Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

•

For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free

Layout help topic.

5.

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

•

For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout Guide .




Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Important

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A

Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

5.


6.

Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the

L


7.

Conrm the print settings and start printing.

Note

•





Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)


Important

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

Click the original size in the

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A


8.

Make your selection in the

E




9.



10.


A


11.


M


Note

•





Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS 9)


Important

•


•


1.


2.


3.

Click the original size in the

A

Page Size list.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C


8.

Make your selection in the

F




9.



10.


A


11.


N


Note

•





Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)

This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.

•

Document: Any Type

•

Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


E


6.





7.

In

A

Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

8.


L


9.


M


(420.0mm).

10.


11.

Select the

A


12.

Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the

B


Note

•

You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page

Layout Printing dialog box by clicking

C

Set.

13.


Note

•





Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)


•

Document: Any Type

•

Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.

Access the Layout pane.

7.

Click 4 in the

A

Pages per Sheet list.

Note

•

You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in

B

Layout

Direction and

C

Border (or Border ).



8.



9.

In the

A


10.


E


11.


12.


A





13.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


14.

Make sure

C


C



15.


M


Note

•





Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9)


•

Document: Any Type

•

Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C


8.


F





9.


10.

Select the

I


11.

Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the

I


Note

•

You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in

J

Layout

Direction and

K

Page Border.

12.


13.


A





14.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


15.


N


Note

•




Centering originals

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls

You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

Centering originals relative to roll paper width

If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (→P.380)

•

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (→P.382)

•

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9) (→P.385)



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

Centering originals on sheets

If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be aligned in the upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (→P.388)

•

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (→P.390)

•

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9) (→P.392)



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


E


6.




Centering originals

7.

In the

A


8.


L


9.


M


(297.0mm).

10.


11.

Select the

G

Print Centered check box.

12.


Note

•




Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A


8.


E




Centering originals

9.


10.


A


11.


B


10-in. Roll.

Note

•


B


L




Centering originals

12.

Make sure the

C


C



13.

Select the

J


14.


M


Note

•




Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C


8.


F




Centering originals

9.


10.

Make sure the

B


A



11.




Centering originals

12.


A


13.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in

B

Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO

A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


14.

Select the

F


15.


N


Note

•




Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)

This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.

•

Document: Any type

•


•


•

Paper Type: Plain Paper

•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.

Select the type of document in the

E


6.


7.

In

A




8.

Select the

C


9.

Click Match Page Size in the

G


10.

Click

F


11.


L


12.


Centering originals

13.

Select the

G


14.


Note

•


Important

•

If you have selected Manual as the media source but have not loaded the paper yet, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to complete the size setting before loading the paper.



Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•

Page size: A4/Letter

•

Paper: Sheets

•


•

Paper size: Non-standard

1.


2.

In the

C


3.

Click

F


4.

In the application software menu, choose Print.

5.


6.

In the

A


7.


E




Centering originals

8.


9.


A


10.

Make sure

C


C



11.

Select the

J


12.


M


Note

•


Important

•




Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•

Page size: A4/Letter

•


•


•

Paper size: Non-standard

1.

Choose Page Setup from the source application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.

2.

In the

A


3.

Click

I


4.


5.


6.

In the

C


7.


F




Centering originals

8.


9.

Make sure

B

Page Size shows the original size as specied in Page Setup in the Page


10.




Centering originals

11.


A


12.

Select the

F


13.


N


Note

•


Important

•




Conserving roll paper

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ts within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.

Important

•

If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to t Roll

Paper Width to print rotated pages.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (→P.404)

•

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (→P.406)

•

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS 9) (→P.409)




Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)

You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.

Important

•

Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.

•

Banner printing

•

If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout

Note

•

Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.

•

Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents, depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) (→P.397)

•

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (→P.399)

•

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9) (→P.402)




Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.





6.

In the

A


7.


L


8.


M


(297.0mm).

9.


10.

Select the

I

No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.

11.


Note

•





Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A





8.


9.


A


10.


B


A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





11.

Make sure the

C


C



12.

Select the

K

No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.

13.


M


Note

•





Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9)


•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C





8.


9.


A


10.


B


A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


11.

Select the

H

No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.

12.


N


Note

•






(Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•

Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.





6.

In the

A


7.


L


8.


M


(297.0mm).

9.

Select the

K

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.

10.


Note

•






(Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•

Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A





8.


9.


A


10.


B


A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





11.

Make sure the

C


C



12.

Select the

L

Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.

13.


M


Note

•






(Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.

•

Document: Any type

•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C





8.


9.


A


10.


B


ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


11.

Select the

I

Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.

12.


N


Note

•




Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Using this printer, you can print ne lines and text clearly and sharply. It’s easy to produce highly precise drawings from CAD applications.

For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.412)

•

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.414)

•





Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)


•


•

Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


D


E

Print

Target list.

Note

•


E


F

View Settings.

6.





7.

In

A

Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case, click ISO A3.

8.


L


9.


M


(420.0mm).

10.



11.


Note

•





Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)


•


•

Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.

In the

A


8.


D


E

Print

Target list.

Note

•


E


F

View set..




9.


10.


A


11.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.

Make sure

C


C

Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.

13.



14.


M


Note

•







•


•

Page Size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

•


•


•

Paper size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])

1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

In the

C





8.


E


F

Print

Target list.

Note

•


F


G

View set.

9.


10.


A


11.



12.


N


Note

•




Other useful settings

Printing With Watermarks

You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.

Other useful settings

Watermark

Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.

Important

•

Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.

The following watermarks are provided:

•

CONFIDENTIAL (Windows)

•

COPY (Windows and Mac OS 9)

•

DRAFT (Windows and Mac OS 9)

•

FILE COPY (Windows and Mac OS 9)

•

FINAL (Windows)

•

PRELIMINARY (Windows and Mac OS 9)

•

PROOF (Windows)

•

TOP SECRET (Windows and Mac OS 9)

You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.

•

Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame, if desired.

•

Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.

•

Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the document image. You can also print the watermark only on the rst page, if desired.

Note

•

Watermarks are supported in Windows and Mac OS 9.

•

In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows. In Mac

OS 9, you can use up to 50 original watermarks including the watermarks provided.

For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:

•

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) (→P.436)

•

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9) (→P.438)




Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation

You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.

Orientation

Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.

Rotate 180 degrees

The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.

Mirror

A mirror image of the original is printed.

For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (→P.429)

•

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (→P.431)

•

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS 9) (→P.434)




Using Favorites

You can register print settings as “favorites” to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.

Favorites

Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing, and you can check the settings details.

Note

•

You can also save the favorite settings as les. Using these les is a convenient way to print under the same conditions on another computer. (In Windows and Mac OS 9.)

For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Using Favorites (Windows) (→P.448)

•

Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (→P.506)

•

Using Favorites (Mac OS 9) (→P.529)

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing

Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.

Note

•

It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)


Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the roll, or you can print a cut line.

For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (→P.424)

•

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.425)

•

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9) (→P.427)




Printing from Photoshop

You can print images in the Adobe RGB color space that you have created in Photoshop, the Adobe Systems photo retouching application. Using the dedicated Photoshop printer driver plug-in (provided with the printer) makes it easy to print Adobe RGB images more attractively.

•

Using the Plug-in to Print (→P.422)

•

Using the Printer Driver to Print (→P.422)

Using the Plug-in to Print

The imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop is a dedicated plug-in provided with the printer that you can load in Photoshop and customize for your printing needs. By using the plug-in, you can print while preserving the 16-bit RGB data from Photoshop without losing the exceptional color gradations of original image. Some of the settings and customizations available in the plug-in are as follows.

•

Automatic detection of the color space (sRGB or Adobe RGB) for automatic selection of the optimal prole. This feature eliminates the need to complete intricate settings when printing Adobe RGB images.

•

Advanced gray adjustment, including adjustment of tone curves, in addition to an array of standard adjustments for color balance, brightness, contrast, highlight, and shadow.

•

Fine-tune color tones in Photoshop while viewing a preview that accurately reproduces printing results.

•

With print log management, you can save and load setting parameters from past print jobs.

Note

• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop for Windows and Macintosh are provided with the printer.

For instructions and details on which versions of Photoshop are compatible with the imagePROGRAF Print

Plug-In for Photoshop, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide (Windows)

• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide (Macintosh)

Using the Printer Driver to Print

The printer driver offers the following settings and adjustments.

•

Choose the standard sRBG color space or Adobe RGB as desired.

•

Adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray levels.

For instructions on using the printer driver to print Adobe RGB images created in Photoshop, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) (→P.465)

•

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) (→P.507)

•

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.531)




Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.

Important

•

PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.

Edit Using PosterArtist

PosterArtist offers a wide range of features, including features to insert source documents in posters and compose an original with them.

Important

•


For detailed instructions on editing with PosterArtist, refer to the following topic:

•

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows) (→P.463)




Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as how to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.

Note

•

Auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function after it is disabled, or to change the setting for printing a cut line instead.

1.


2.


3.


4.


L


5.

Click

N

Auto Cut to display the Automatic Cutting Settingsdialog box.

6.

To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the

A

Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.

7.

Click OK to close the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.

8.


Note

•


Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.




Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)


Note

•

The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a cut guideline instead.

1.


2.


B


3.


C


4.

Click

F


5.


6.


7.


A





8.


9.

In the

A


10.

Click

C

Set to display the Media Detailed Settingsdialog box.

11.

To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the

H


Important

•

If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel.

12.

Click OK to close the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

13.


M


Note

•





Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9)


Note

•

The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.

Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a cut guideline instead.

1.


2.


3.


A

Page Size list.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.


7.

Make sure Roll Paper is selected in

A

Media Source.




8.


9.

In the

C


10.

Click

D

Set to display the Media Detailed Settingsdialog box.

11.

To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the

H


Important

•

If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel.

12.

Click OK to close the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.

13.


N


Note

•






Orientation (Windows)

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

•

Document: An original in landscape orientation

•

Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


E


6.





7.

In the

A


8.

In

H

Orientation, click

J

Landscape.

9.


L


10.


M


(420.0mm).

11.


Note

•






Orientation (Mac OS X)


•


•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


B


3.

In the

C


4.

In

D


5.

Click

F


6.


7.


8.

In the

A


9.


E





10.


11.


A


12.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





13.

Make sure the

C


C



14.


M


Note

•






Orientation (Mac OS 9)


•


•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In

A


4.

In

B


5.

Click

I


6.


7.


8.

In the

C




9.


F


10.



11.


A


12.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


13.


N


Note

•





Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on

(Windows)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on the following example.

•


•

Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A


5.


D


E

Print

Target list.

Note

•


E


F

View Settings.



6.



7.

In

A


8.


L


9.


M


(420.0mm).

10.


11.

Select the

D

Watermark check box.

12.

Click FILE COPY in the

E

Watermarks list.

Note

•

To create your own, original watermark, click

F

Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.

13.


Note

•





Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on

(Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on the following example.

•


•

Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])

•

Paper: Roll

•


•


1.


2.


3.

In the

A


4.

Click

I


5.


6.





7.

In the

C


8.


E


F

Print

Target list.

Note

•


F


G

View set..

9.


10.


A


11.


B


ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

•


B


L





12.

Select the

C

Watermark check box.

13.

Click FILE COPY in the

D

Watermarks list.

Note

•

To create your own, original watermark, click

E

Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.

14.



15.


N


Note

•




Software

Windows

Printer Driver Settings (Windows)

For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.

•

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (→P.473)

•

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (→P.475)

Windows

For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

•

Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450)

You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose

Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

•

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.486)

•

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P.491)

•

Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows) (→P.477)

•

Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (→P.483)

•

Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows) (→P.458)

•

Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.454)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the media size and source, and automatic cutting.

•

Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.487)

Software 441


Windows

•

Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.456)

You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing options.

•

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.490)

•

Favorites Sheet (Windows) (→P.459)

Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved in a favorite. Favorites you have added can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.

•

Utility Sheet (Windows) (→P.460)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

•

Support Sheet (Windows) (→P.461)

You can view support information and the user’s manual.

•

Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (→P.462)

You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the printer driver version.

imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout Guide .

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .

442 Software


Conrming Print Settings (Windows)

There are two ways to conrm the print settings, as follows.

•

Checking a preview of the settings (→P.443)

•

Checking a print preview (→P.444)

Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, media source, layout, and so on.

Windows

Display Area

Top illustrations

Middle, bordered area

Bottom illustrations

Information Displayed

Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction are displayed.

Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

Note

•

To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click

F

View Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box.

Software 443


Windows

Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.

When you activate this feature, PageComposer is launched before printing. Conrming how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)”. (→P.445)

444 Software


Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)

This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1.


2.


3.


Windows

4.

Select the

L

Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

5.

When you attempt to print, the PageComposer window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

6.

In the PageComposer editing window, select the document to print and open the Print Preview window.

7.

After conrming that the layout is just as you expected, close the Print Preview window.

8.

In the PageComposer editing window, make sure the document to print is selected. Choose

Print from the File menu.


Software 445

Windows

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and congure printer driver settings for the media source and media type.

Note

•

To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click Get Information by Media Type.


A

Media Source

Shows the Media Source supported by the printer, as well as information about the loaded paper. To update the Media Source and media type settings in the printer driver, select the desired Media Source option and click OK .

446 Software


Windows

Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)

The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to conrm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout, and Favorites sheets.

A

Copy

Button

Corresponding Utility

Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste the settings information into a le created with a text editor or similar application.


Software 447

Windows

Using Favorites (Windows)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1.


2.


3.

Complete the print settings.

4.

Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

5.

Click

H

Add to display the Add dialog box.

6.

Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.

•

Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”

•

Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.

•

In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.

7.

Click OK to close the Add dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in

A

Favorites.

Note

•

To save a favorite as a le, click

J

Export and specify the le to save.

448 Software


Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1.


2.


3.

Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

Windows

4.

In the

A

Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.

Note

•

To import a favorite, click

I

Import and specify the favorite le.

5.

Click

D

Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.

6.


Note

•



Software 449

Windows

Main Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

•

On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Conguration using Easy Settings

Setting Item

A

Media Type

Description




B

Get Information

Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source, media type, and roll width.

C

Preferences

Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time and other detailed settings based on the paper type.

E

Print Target






F

View Settings

Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the

E

Print Target list or change the order of items listed in

E

Print Target .

L

Open Preview When Print

Job Starts

Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.

Conrming the Print Image Before Printing (→P.485)

450 Software


Setting Item

M

Status Monitor

N

S

About

Defaults

Windows

Description

Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which enables you to conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.

You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.

For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.

Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.


Software 451

Windows

Conguration using Advanced Settings

Setting Item

A

Media Type

E

B

C

Get Information

Preferences

Print Priority

Description




Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source, media type, and roll width.



Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

(→P.173)

F

G

Print Quality

Color Mode

Choose the level of print quality.


(→P.173)

Choose the color mode.


(→P.173)

The available Color Mode options vary depending on the Media Type setting.

H

Color Settings

Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.184)

I

Thicken Fine Lines

J


Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.

Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned lines and ensure better results.

K


Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, this will take more time than regular printing.

L

Open Preview When Print

Job Starts

Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.

Conrming the Print Image Before Printing (→P.485)

452 Software


Setting Item

M

Status Monitor

N

S

About

Defaults

Windows

Description

Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which enables you to conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.

You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings.

For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.

Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.



Software 453

Windows

Page Setup Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Page Setupsheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A

Page Size

B


Description

Select the page size as specied in the source application.

For details on available page sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)

Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the

L

Media

Source list. Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.297)

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.299)

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.279)

D

Fit Media Size

E

Scale to t Roll Paper

Width

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F

Print Image with Actual

Size

Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available, when you have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either length or width of the document from the

A

Page Size list.

G

Media Size

Available when Fit Media

Size is selected.

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)

Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.

C


Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.244)

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.245)

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.246)

D

Fit Media Size


E



F

Scaling

Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a value in a range of “5-600.”

G

Media Size



454 Software


Setting Item

H

Orientation

K

Rotate Page 90 degrees

(Conserve Paper)

L

Media Source

M

N

Roll Paper Width

Auto Cut

Windows

Description

Choose the printing orientation.

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (→P.420)

Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.395)

Choose how paper is supplied.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media

Type in the Main sheet.

Choose the roll width.

For details on available roll widths, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)

You can activate or deactivate automatic cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. Click to display the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.

O

S

Size Options

Defaults

Under

A

Automatic Cutting , you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut

Guideline .

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (→P.421)

Click to display the Media Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.

Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.


Software 455

Windows

Layout Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Layoutsheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A

Page Layout

Description

Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.355)

Printing Posters in Sections (→P.356)

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P.352)

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (→P.423)

D

C

Set

Watermark

Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in

A

Page Layout . In these dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.

•

Page Layout Printing

•

Pages to Print

•

Free Layout Settings

Activating this option makes two settings available,

E

Watermarks and

F

Edit Watermark .

Printing With Watermarks (→P.419)

E

Watermarks

Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

F

Edit Watermark

Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

G

Print Centered

Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.378)

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.379)

H


I

No Spaces at Top or

Bottom (Conserve Paper)

Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.

Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

(→P.396)

J

Copies

Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”

Reverse Order

Collate

Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.

Activate this option to print complete sets in the specied quantity.

456 Software


Setting Item

M

Special Settings

S

Defaults

Windows

Description

If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how printing is processed.



Software 457

Windows

Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment sheet.

Gray Adjustment

On the Gray Adjustment sheet, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image qualities.

Note

•

To display the Gray Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , select Monochrome

(Photo) by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.

•



A

Sample

The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B

Sample List

Select a sample image, as desired.

C

Color Balance

D

X

E

Y

Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.

Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.

You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.

Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.

You can click the arrows by the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) boxes or enter the values directly.

F

Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image

(that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

G

Contrast

H

I

Highlight

Shadow

K

Defaults

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.

Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.


458 Software


Windows

Favorites Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Favoritessheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A

Favorites

B

Settings Details

C

Comment

Description

Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.

Using Favorites (→P.421)

Displays details of the favorite selected in the

Displays notes registered in the favorite.

A

Favorites .

D

E

Application Settings Priority

Activate this setting to use settings values specied in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected in the

A

Favorites , when clicking

D

Apply Favorite . For details on the settings items used in preference, refer to the printer driver help.

F

Apply Favorite

Delete

G

Edit

Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the

A

Favorites .

Click to delete the selected favorite settings from the

A

Favorites .

Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the name and icon for the favorite settings selected in the Favorites .

H

Add

Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.

I

J

Import

Export


Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a le.

Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a le.

Software 459

Windows

Utility Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Utilitysheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.

A

B

Maintenance

Button

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy


Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

•

Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check

•

Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning

•

Head alignment adjustment

•

Feed amount adjustment

Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement

Copy (*1) (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to create hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a

Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.248)

*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .

460 Software


Support Sheet (Windows)

On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user’s manual.

Windows

A

Support Information

Button

B

User Manual

C

Settings Summaries


Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s manual to be installed on your computer.

Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the

Main , Page Setup , Layout , and Favorites sheets.


Software 461

Windows

Device Settings Sheet (Windows)

Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the

Device Settings sheet is for conguring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.

The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.

A

About


You can display version information for the printer driver.

462 Software


Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)

This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster layout for printing.

Windows

Important

•

PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Select the

A


6.

Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the

B


7.

When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8.

Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.

Software 463


Windows

9.

Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.

Important

•

Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

•

For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.

10.

Print from the PosterArtist menu.

464 Software


Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)

This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.

•

Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop

•

Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)

•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll Paper Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Important

•

In Photoshop, select no color-matching.

•

In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.

1.

In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.

Note

•

The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.

•

For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.

2.

Choose Print with Preview from the File menu to display the Print dialog box.

3.

Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.

4.

In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.

5.

Click Print to display the Print dialog box.

6.

Select the printer and click Properties to display the printer driver dialog box.

7.


Windows

8.

In the

A


Photo Paper.

Software 465


Windows

9.

Click

D


10.

Click Image in the

E


11.

Select the print quality in the

F


Note

•


F


12.


G


13.

Click

H


14.

Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.

15.

In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.

16.

In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.

17.


18.


466 Software


19.

In the

A



20.


L


21.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in. Roll

(254.0mm), and then click OK.

22.


Windows

Note

•



Software 467

Windows

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : “Printer List” shows a list of printers, and

“Status Monitor” shows details for each printer.

•

You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.

•

Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

•

If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

•

Images of Ink Tanks are shown, with different images for various types of ink. An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels are low.

•

The type of paper loaded in each media source is identied. You can also check to see if paper has run out.

•

This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance for optimal printing results.

•

You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

Note

•

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

468 Software


imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.

Windows

•

Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this list, select the printer (specically, the printer’s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then congure the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer’s IP address and the network frame type.

•

You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication between your computer and these printers is possible.

Note

•

We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

•

For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.


Software 469

Windows

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

•

In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.

3.

Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

470 Software


Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility

From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Windows

Important

•

To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator” account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.

•

For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility”. (→P.470)

1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2.

In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.

3.

Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4.

In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.

5.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

6.

Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.

7.

Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Note

•

To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.

•

You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.


Software 471

Windows

Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image

les on your computer with various other applications.

•

Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.

•

You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.

•

Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image for retouching and click Image Adjustment.

•

Because this application automates the workow from retouching to display for all of your images, it can save time and work in retouching.

Note

•

For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.

472 Software


Windows

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Windows)

1.

Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

Note

•

The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.

In the following case, click Preferences.

■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software



Note

•

The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed.

Software 473


Windows

Important

•

If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.

•

You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.149)

474 Software


Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows)

1.

Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

Windows

3.

Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

Note

•

The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver. (→P.462)


Software 475

Windows



Important

•

If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.

•

You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.473)

476 Software


Windows

Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows)

In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.

However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.

Color Adjustment : color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.

Note

•

To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A

Preview


B

Original

The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can compare it to the Preview image.

C

Cyan

D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness

Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

G

Contrast


H

Saturation

Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

I


Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.

Software 477


Windows

Setting Item

J

Object Adjustment

S

Defaults

Description

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.


Note

•

For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.184)

Object Adjustment dialog box

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

•

To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.


A

Image

Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B

Graphics

Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C

Text

Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

478 Software


Windows

Matching sheet: Driver Matching Mode

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the Matching Mode list.

Note

•

To display the Matching sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet.


A

Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Normally, select Driver Matching Mode . For color matching based on

ICC proles, select ICC Matching Mode , Driver ICM Mode , or Host ICM

Mode , depending on your color matching system. If you don’t want color matching using the printer driver, select Off .

B

Matching Method

Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.

Various Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in Matching .

C

Color Space

Select the applicable color space as desired.

Note

•


Software 479


Windows

Matching sheet: ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, and Host

ICM Mode

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, Driver

ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode on the Matching Mode sheet.

Note

•

To display the Matching sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet.


A

Matching Mode


B

Input Prole Settings

You can select Image , Graphics , or Text . You can choose Matching

Method and Input Prole .

Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode .

To apply the same input prole automatically for Graphics and Text , select

Use the Same Prole for All Objects . To apply separate input proles to Graphics and Text , clear Use the Same Prole for All Objects and specify the individual settings.

C

Printer Prole Settings

Specify the printer prole as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings .

Note

•


480 Software


Windows

Matching sheet: Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos)

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select Ambient Light Matching

Mode (Kyuanos) in the Matching Mode list.

When you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method

When you select By entering values directly in Setting Method

Setting Item

A

Matching Mode

B

Matching Method

C

Setting Method

D

Print Chart

Description


Here, select Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) .

Select the matching method.

You can choose conguration based on printed Charts or based on using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Click to start the Light Source Check Tool , for printing Charts . The

Light Source Check Tool must be installed to use this function.

Software 481


Windows

Setting Item

E

Chart Number

F

Lighting Source Type

G

Color Temperature

Description

In Chart , select the number of the pattern with your desired colors.

Select the light source measured using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Select the value measured using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.

Light Source Check Tool

The Light Source Check Tool enables you to print Chart.

Setting Item

A

Printer

B

Media Type

C

Media Source

D

Print

Description

The printer name is displayed here.

Select the type of paper, as desired. For information on the types of paper compatible with Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) , refer to the

Paper Reference Guide . (→P.108)

Choose the media source, as desired.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type in the Main sheet.

Click to print the Chart .

482 Software


Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings sheet for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment : monochrome

On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Windows

Note

•

To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A

Preview


B

Original


C

Cyan

D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness

Not available.


G

Contrast


H

Saturation

I


J


Not available.

Not available.


S

Defaults


Software 483


Windows

Note

•




Note

•

To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.


A

Image


B

Graphics


C

Text


484 Software


Conrming the Print Image Before Printing

The preview screen displayed before printing enables you to see the original image just as it will be printed.

Conrming the image of print jobs helps prevent printing errors.

For instructions on previewing print jobs, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•

Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows) (→P.445)

•

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.497)

•

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9) (→P.520)

Windows


Software 485

Windows

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)


Note

•

To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click



A

Media Type




B

Drying Time



(→P.135)

C

Between Pages


D

Between Scans


E


Safety

F

Near End Margin



G

Cut Speed


H



I

Mirror


486 Software


Windows

Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)

In the Media Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Media Size. The sizes you dene are listed with standard media sizes for selection later as needed.

Note

•

To display the Media Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.454) , click

Media Size Options.


A

Media Size List

Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver.

B

Delete

Custom media sizes created by users can be deleted from the Media Size

List , as needed.

However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.

•

If a standard media size of the printer driver is selected.

•

If an oversized media size is selected.

•

If a media size in a red box is selected.

C

Custom Media Size Name

You can name Custom Media Size as desired.

D

Units

Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Media Size height and width.

E

Media Size

Specify the desired Width and Height . You can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with Borderless Printing by selecting

Borderless Printing Size . To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width

to Height .

F

Add

Enables you to register the custom media size you have specied or overwrite an existing custom media size.

G

Display Series

You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size , Media Size , and Media Size List .

Software 487


Windows

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)


Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.



1.

Register a hot folder on your computer


2.







1.


2.

Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.

3.

Click

B

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy utility.

4.

Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.

For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.

488 Software


Windows



Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.




1.


2.


3.


4.



Note

•


Copy Guide .


Software 489

Windows

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special

Settings dialog box.

Note

•

To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.456) , click Special

Settings.


A

FineZoom Settings

This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto . If documents are not printed correctly on large-format media, it may help to select Yes , and if ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted when printed, it may help to select No .

B

Fast Graphic Process

If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.

C

Application Color

Matching Priority

You can give applications priority in color management.

490 Software


View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

(Windows)

In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Windows

Note

•

To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.450) , click View Settings by Print Target.


A

Print Target

Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B

Name

Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

C

Details

Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target .


Software 491

Mac OS X

Mac OS X

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)

For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.

•

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (→P.511)

For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

•

Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499)

You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose

Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

•

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P.515)

•

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (→P.516)

•

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) (→P.512)

•

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.514)

•

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.504)

•

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.501)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the media size and source, and automatic cutting.

•

Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.503)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

•

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.505)

You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.

•

Support Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.506)

You can view support information and the user’s manual.

With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications on a single page before printing. For details, see the Free Layout Guide .

With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see the imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .

With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .

492 Software


Mac OS X

Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)

There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.

•


•



A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Utility, and Additional

Settings panes. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, media source, and so on.

Pane displayed when the Images tab is clicked

Display Area Information Displayed

On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.

Pane displayed when the Size tab is clicked

Paper size details are indicated numerically.

Pane with printer and paper illustrations Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

Software 493


Mac OS X

Note

•


F

View set. on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box.



Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X)”. (→P.497)

494 Software


Mac OS X

Checking the Layout Before Printing

You can check the print layout on the preview screen. While viewing this screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

Preview (Macintosh)

Important

•

The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.

For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:

•

Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.496)


Software 495

Mac OS X

Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.

1.


2.

Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview.

3.

The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

4.

Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.

5.

Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.

Note

•

For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .

496 Software


Mac OS X

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X)


1.


2.

Click Preview to open the preview window.

3.

Check the layout and other aspects of the printing image, and then click Print to start printing.

Note

•

“Preview” is provided as a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.


Software 497

Mac OS X

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and congure printer driver media type setting.

Note

•

To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , click Get Information by Media Type.


A

Media Source

Shows the Media Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of paper loaded. To update the media type setting in the printer driver, select the desired Media Source option and click OK .

498 Software


Main Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Mac OS X

Note

•

On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.


A

Media Type

E

L

B

Get Information

C

Setting Item

Set

Print Target

F

View set.

Printer Information

Description




Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source and media type.






Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the

E

Print Target list or change the order of items listed in

E

Print Target .

Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

Software 499


Mac OS X


Setting Item

A

Media Type

Description




B

Get Information

Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media source and media type.

C

Set


E

Print Priority



(→P.173)

F

Print Quality



(→P.173)

H

Color Mode



(→P.173)

I

Set



J



K


Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, this will take more time than regular printing.

L

Printer Information

Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

500 Software


Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Mac OS X

Setting Item

A

Media Source

Description

Choose how paper is supplied.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in

A

Media

Type in the Main pane.

B


Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.

C

Page Size

Displays the size of the original, as specied in the page settings of the application.

For details on page sizes available in the application.see “Paper Sizes”.

(→P.113)

D






H

E

Fit Media Size

Resizes the document image to match the paper size.

F


Resizes the document image to match the roll width.

G

Scaling



Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the

Source list.

A

Media

Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.




I

Media Size


Click Display all selections for Media Size to list available sizes.


Software 501


Mac OS X

Setting Item

J

Print Centered

Description

Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.



K

No Spaces at Top or Bottom Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom

Margins (→P.396)

L


Activate this setting to rotate the original 90 degrees before printing.


502 Software


Mac OS X

Utility Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Utilitypane.

A

B

C

Set

View

Set


Click to display the Printer dialog box, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

•


•


•


Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor , which enables you to view the status of print jobs.

Click to complete the settings for Auto Arrange or Color imageRUNNER

Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy).

*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .


Software 503

Mac OS X

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane.

Gray Adjustment

On the Gray Adjustment pane, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image qualities.

Note

•

To display the Gray Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , select Monochrome


•



A

Sample


B

Sample List

C

Color Balance

D

X

E

Y







F

Brightness



G

Contrast


H

Highlight

I

Shadow



504 Software


Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Additional Settingspane.

Mac OS X

Setting Item

A

Data Send Method

Description

Choose how printing data is sent to the printer.

•

•

B

Send Print Data Immediately to Printer

C

Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer


Software 505

Mac OS X

Support Pane (Mac OS X)

On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user’s manual.

A

Support Information

Button

B

User Manual

C

Settings

D

About


Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

Click to view the printer user’s manual. This function requires the user’s manual to be installed on your computer.

The settings can be saved as a le. Click to display the Export dialog box, which enables you to specify where to save the le.

You can display version information for the printer driver.

Using Favorites (Mac OS X)

You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.

Note

•

In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

506 Software


Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)


•


•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•

Roll Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

Important

•

Do not set up color-matching in Photoshop.

•

In the printer driver, specify Driver Correction and set Color Space to Adobe RGB.

1.


Note

•

Photoshop CS2 is used in this example.

•


2.

Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box.

3.

Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.

4.

In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.

5.

Click Print.

6.


Mac OS X

7.

In the

A


Photo Paper.

Software 507


Mac OS X

8.

Click

D


9.


E


10.


F


Note

•


F


11.


H


12.

Click

I


13.

Click Matching to display the Matching pane.

14.

In Mode, click Driver Correction.

15.


16.


17.


508 Software


Mac OS X

18.


A


19.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the

B

Roll Paper Width list-here,

10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

Note

•


B


L


20.

Make sure the page size as specied in Photoshop is shown in

C

Page Size -in this case,

10"x12".

21.


M


Note

•



Software 509

Mac OS X

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

•


•

You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.

•


•


Note

•

If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer again as follows.

1.

Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.

2.

In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.

After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.

3.

If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.

4.

Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the

Search button.

Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.

5.



510 Software


Mac OS X


Applications (Mac OS X)

1.


Note

•


2.


3.




Software 511

Mac OS X

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)



Color Adjustment pane: color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note

•

To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A

Preview

The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B

Original


C

Cyan

D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness



G

Contrast


H

Saturation


I

Gray Tone


512 Software


Mac OS X

Note

•


Matching pane

On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Note

•

To display the Matching pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Matching.


A

Matching Mode


B

Matching Method

Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various

Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in

Matching .

C

Color Space


Note

•


Software 513


Mac OS X

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome

On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

•

To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , click Color Settings in Advanced Settings.


A

Preview


B

Original


C

Cyan

D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness

Not available.


G

Contrast


H

Saturation

I

Gray Tone

Not available.

Not available.

Note

•


514 Software


Mac OS X

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)


Note

•

To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , click



A

Media Type




B

Drying Time



(→P.135)

C

Between Pages


D

Between Scans


E


Safety

F

Near End Margin



G

Cut Speed


H


You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify Yes , No, or Print Cut Guideline .

I



J

Mirror


Software 515


Mac OS X


(Mac OS X)


Note

•

To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.499) , click View Settings by Print Target.


A

Print Target


B

Name

C

Details


Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.

516 Software


Mac OS 9

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)

For instructions on accessing the Mac OS 9 printer driver, refer to the following topics.

•

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS 9) (→P.535)

Mac OS 9

For information on the Mac OS 9 printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

•

Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521)

You can specify the number of copies, page range, media type, color processing, print quality, and print preview. Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or

Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

•

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) (→P.542)

•

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS 9) (→P.544)

•

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9) (→P.537)

•

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9) (→P.540)

•

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.523)

You can specify the amount of enlargement or reduction, borderless printing, media size, and page layout.

•

Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.525)

You can specify the media source, watermarks, and orientation.

•

Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.527)

You can perform maintenance for the Printhead or feed amount.

•

Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) (→P.543)

•

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.528)

You can specify settings for background printing, how print jobs are sent to the printer, and notication after printing.

Software 517


Mac OS 9

Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)

There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.

•


•



A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Finishing, Utility, and

Additional Settings panes. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size, orientation, media source, and so on.

Display Area

Pane displayed when the is clicked

H

Images tab

Information Displayed

On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other settings information.

Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.

Paper size details are indicated numerically.

Pane displayed when the clicked

I

Size tab is

Pane with printer and paper illustrations Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing selection, and other settings information.

518 Software


Mac OS 9

Note

•


G

View set. on the Main pane to display the View set. dialog box.



Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.520)


Software 519

Mac OS 9

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9)


1.


2.

Click Preview to open the preview window.

3.

Check the layout and other aspects of the printing image, and then click Print this page to start printing.

Note

•

“Preview” is provided as a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

520 Software


Main Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Mac OS 9

Note

•

On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.


Setting Item

A

Copies

B

Page

C

Media Type

D

Set

F

Print Target

L

G

View set.

Printer

Description


Specify the pages to print.

•

All Pages

•

From and To









Click to display the View set. dialog box, which enables you to conrm the settings for the selected item from the order of items listed in

F

Print Target .

F

Print Target list or change the

Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

Software 521


Mac OS 9


Setting Item

A

Copies

B

C

F

G

H

K

L

Page

Media Type

D

Set

Print Priority

Print Quality

Color Mode

I

Thicken Fine Lines

Printer

Set

J


Description


Specify the pages to print.

•

All Pages

•

From and To







(→P.173)



(→P.173)



(→P.173)




Depending on the printing conditions, unidirectional printing may be the default setting even if you do not choose it. In this case, the printing speed will not change if you activate the setting.

Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.

Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and gives other information about the printer.

522 Software


Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Mac OS 9

Setting Item

A


B

Page Size

Description

Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer.

Displays the page size, as specied in the source application.

For details on paper sizes available from the source application, see

“Paper Sizes”. (→P.113)

C






D

Fit Media Size


E



F

Scaling


G


Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected from the

A

Media Source list in the Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9). (→P.525)

Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.




H

Media Size



I

Page Layout

Activate this option to select the page layout when printing multiple pages per sheet.(*1)

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.355)

Printing Posters in Sections (→P.356)

Software 523


Mac OS 9

Setting Item

J

Layout Direction

K

Page Border

Description

This setting is available when

I

Page Layout is selected. Here, you can specify the orientation of multiple pages to be printed on a single sheet.

This setting is available when

I

Page Layout is selected. Here, you can specify the type of boundary line around each page of multiple pages printed on a single sheet.

*1: Selecting poster layout from the

I

Page Layout list displays a check box for specifying the pages to print.

524 Software


Mac OS 9

Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Finishing pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A

Media Source

Description

You can choose the media source.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in

C

Media

Type in the Main Pane (Mac OS 9). (→P.521)

B

C


Watermark

Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.

Activating this option makes two settings available,

E

Edit Watermark .

Printing With Watermarks (→P.419)

D

Watermarks and

D

Watermarks

E

Edit Watermark

Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

F

Print Centered

Choose this option to print the document images in the center of the paper.



G


H

No Spaces at Top or Bottom Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom

Margins (→P.396)

I





Software 525


Mac OS 9

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane.

Gray Adjustment

On the Gray Adjustment pane, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image qualities.

Note

•

To display the Gray Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521) , select Monochrome


•



A

Sample


B

Sample List


C

Color Balance

D

X

E

Y






F

Brightness



G

Contrast


H

Highlight

I

Shadow



526 Software


Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Device Settings pane.

Mac OS 9

A

Utility


Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

•


•


•



Software 527

Mac OS 9

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Additional Settingspane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Setting Item

A

Background Printing

D

Data Send Method

G

Printing Finished Alert Method

H

Make a Sound

J

Display a Message

Description

Choose the printing method.

Activate this setting by clicking

B

On to print in the background.

Deactivate this setting by clicking

C

Off to print in the foreground.

Choose how printing data is sent to the printer.

•

E

Send Print Data Immediately to Printer

•

F

Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer

Choose how to notify when printing is nished.

Specify how to be notied when printing is nished, by a tone or a message.

Activate this setting to be notied by a tone when printing is

nished. You can also choose a different tone.

Activate this setting to be notied by a dialog box when printing is nished.

528 Software


Using Favorites (Mac OS 9)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1.


2.


3.

Complete the print settings.

4.

In the Favorites list, click Add Favorite to display the Add Favorite dialog box.

5.

Complete the following settings in the Add Favorite dialog box.

•

Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”

•

In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added.

6.

Click OK to close the Add Favorite dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in Favorites.

Note

•

To edit the name of an existing favorite or comment, click Edit Favorite in the Favorites list to display the Edit Favorite dialog box.

•

To save a favorite as a le, click Export and specify the le to save.

Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1.


2.


Mac OS 9

3.


A

Page Size list.

4.

Click

I


5.


6.

In the Favorites list, choose the favorite you registered.

Note

•

To import a favorite, click Import and specify the favorite le.

•

If you select a favorite and edit it, an icon is displayed at left of the name to indicate that the settings have been changed. For details, refer to the printer driver help.

Software 529


Mac OS 9

7.

Conrm the print settings, and then click Print to start printing.

Note

•


530 Software


Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9)


•


•


•

Paper: Roll

•


•


Important

•

Do not set up color-matching in Photoshop.

•

In the printer driver, specify Driver Matching Mode and set Color Space to Adobe RGB.

1.


Note

•

Photoshop CS2 is used in this example.

•


2.

In the Photoshop menu, choose Print.

3.


Mac OS 9

4.

In the

C


Photo Paper.

Software 531


Mac OS 9

5.

Click

E


6.


F


7.


G


Note

•


G


8.


H


9.

Click

I


10.

Click Matching to display the Matching pane.

11.

In Mode, click Driver Correction.

12.


13.


14.


15.

Make sure the page size as specied in Photoshop is shown in

B

Page Size -in this case,

10"x12".

532 Software


Mac OS 9

16.


17.


A


18.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the

B

Roll Paper Width list-here,

10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

Note

•

If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in the

B

Roll Paper Width list, click the

L

Printer in the Main pane to update the printer information.

19.


N


Note

•


Software 533


Mac OS 9

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

•


•

You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.

•


•


Note

•

If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer again as follows.

1.

Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.

2.



3.

If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.

4.

Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the

Search button.

Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.

5.



534 Software


Mac OS 9


Applications (Mac OS 9)

1.


Note

•


2.



Software 535

Mac OS 9

3.



536 Software


Mac OS 9

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9)



Color Adjustment pane: color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note

•

To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521) , click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A

Preview


B

Original


C

Cyan

D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness



G

Contrast

H

Saturation



Software 537


Mac OS 9

Setting Item

I

Gray Tone

J


Description



Note

•




Note

•

To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment pane.


A

Image


B

Graphics


C

Text


538 Software


Mac OS 9

Matching pane

On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Note

•

To display the Matching pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521) , click Color Settings by Color

Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Matching.


A

Matching Mode


B

Matching Method

Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various

Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in

Matching .

C

Color Space


Note

•


Software 539


Mac OS 9

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome

On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

•

To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521) , click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.


A

Preview

The image above is updated to reect any changes you make to setting items on the right of this pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.

B

Original

The image on the bottom shows the original state before adjustment. You can compare it to the Preview image.

C

Cyan

D

Magenta

E

Yellow

F

Brightness

Not available.

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the monitor).

G

Contrast


H

Saturation

I

Gray Tone

J


Not available.

Not available.


540 Software


Mac OS 9

Note

•




Note

•

To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, on the Color Adjustment pane, click Object Adjustment.


A

Image


B

Graphics


C

Text



Software 541

Mac OS 9

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)


Note

•

To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521) , click



A

Media Type




B

Drying Time



(→P.135)

C

Between Pages


D

Between Scans


E


Safety

F

Near End Margin



G

Cut Speed

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H


You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline .

I

Mirror


542 Software


Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)

If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special

Settings dialog box.

Mac OS 9

Note

•

To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.528) , click Special Settings.


A

Fast Graphic Process

If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.


Software 543

Mac OS 9


(Mac OS 9)


Note

•

To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.521) , click View Settings by Print Target.


A

Print Target


B

Name

C

Details


Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.

544 Software


Network Setting

Network Setting

Network Setting

Network Environment

System requirements

The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.

•

Printing over a TCP/IP network

•

Compatible operating systems

•


•

Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

•

Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

•

Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)

•

Mac OS 9.1 or later

•

Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later

•

Compatible computer

•

A computer that runs one of the above operating systems

•

Printing over an AppleTalk network

•

Compatible operating systems

•

Mac OS 9.1 or later

•

Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later

•

Compatible computer

•


Note

•

The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network.

•

Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2.

•

Printing over a NetWare network

•

Compatible servers

•

Novell NetWare 4.2/5.1/6.0

•

Compatible clients

•


•

Windows XP (Professional)

•

Compatible computer

•


Note

•

In NetWare 6.0, iPrint is not supported.


Network Setting 545

Network Setting

Network environment

After conrming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and computers as needed.

•

Example of a Windows network

In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.

Note

•

NetBIOS is not supported.

•

Example of a Macintosh network

In Macintosh networks, print over AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or TCP/IP, using Bonjour(Zeroconf) functions.

•

Example of a NetWare network

Note

•

Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment, you can use both TCP/IP and AppleTalk.

In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.

546 Network Setting


Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address on the Printer

You must congure the printer’s IP address before using the printer on a TCP/IP network.

The printer’s IP address is congured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions in the Quick Start Guide.

Follow the steps below to congure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the printer Control Panel, or ARP or PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network connection. For details on conguring the IP address, refer to the following topics.

•

Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows) (→P.471)

•

Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.551)

•

Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (→P.552)

Note

•

We recommend conguring the printer’s IP address even if you will use the printer in other network except for TCP/IP. Conguring the printer’s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to congure the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.

For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.555)


Network Setting 547

Network Setting

Initializing the Network Settings

Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.

Important

•

Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer’s IP address. As a result, the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.

•

For instructions on reconguring the IP address, see “Conguring the IP Address on the Printer”.

(→P.547)

•


1.

Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://“printer IP address or name”/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2.

Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3.

If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4.

Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5.

Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.

6.

After conrming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

Note

•

You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default network settings.

•

If you use the Control Panel to initialize the network settings, press the Menu button to display MAIN

MENU, and then press ▲, ▼, and ► to select Interface Setup → Ethernet Driver → Init. Settings →

Yes (in this order), and nally press the OK button.

548 Network Setting


Network Setting

Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IP network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IP group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.

TCP/IP Settings Items

Use DHCP

Use BOOTP

Use RARP

Item Details

Activate this setting to use DHCP for conguring the IP address.

Off

Activate this setting to use

BOOTP for conguring the IP address.

Off

Activate this setting to use RARP for conguring the IP address.

Off

RAW Mode Bi-direction

Enable DNS Dynamic Update

Activate this setting to perform

DNS server registration automatically.

Use Zeroconf Function


Raw mode bidirectional communication.

IP Address

Off

Off


Bonjour.

On

Specify the printer’s IP address.

0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

LPD Printing

Specify the printer’s subnet mask. 0.0.0.0

Specify the printer’s default gateway.

Activate this setting to use LDP

Printing.

0.0.0.0

On

IPP Printing

IPP Printer URI

Activate this setting to use IPP

Printing.

On

Specify the URI of the printer used for IPP printing using up to 252 characters (1-252 characters).

When using a standard Windows port for IPP printing, enter an

URL less than 255 bytes for all characters for “http://<IP address/IPP-URI.” printer

Default Setting

Network Setting 549


Network Setting

RAW Printing

Item Details

Activate this setting to use Raw

Printing.

SMTP Server Address

Specify the SMTP server’s IP address.

Primary DNS Server Address

Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.

On

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Default Setting

Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

DNS Host Name

Specify the printer host name, up to 63 characters (1-63 characters). Use single-byte letters, numbers, and “-”

(hyphens). Do not use numbers or “-” for the rst character or “-” for the last character.

DNS Domain Name

Multicast DNS Service Name

0.0.0.0

NB-17FBxxxxxxxxxxxx

Specify the printer domain name, up to 63 characters. Use single-byte letters, numbers, “-”

(hyphens), and “.” (periods). Do not use numbers, “-”, or “.” for the

rst character, or “-” or “.” for the last character.

(Blank)

Specify the printer’s Multicast

DNS service name, up to 63 characters. (1-63 characters)

This name will be displayed when

Bonjour functions are used.

Canon iPFxxxx (xxxxxx)

7.

Click OK to display the Network page.

Note

•

If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that supports such protocol running in the network.

•

If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this method is used rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specied in IP Address is used.

•

It takes a minute or two to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend clearing check boxes of options you will not use.

•

If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS

Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain Name, respectively.

550 Network Setting


Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control

Panel

This topic describes how to congure the printer’s IP address on the Control Panel.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.

6.

After pressing ◄ or ► to select the input eld, press the OK button to enable numerical input.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

Pressing the ▲ button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is “255,” after which “0” is displayed.

•

Pressing the ▼ button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is “0,” after which “255” is displayed.

•

Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.

8.

Repeat steps 3-4 to enter the IP address assigned to the printer.

9.


If any of the settings are changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Note

•

If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

•

To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Important

•

Be sure to complete step 6. This will activate the values you have entered.

•

You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.


Network Setting 551

Network Setting

Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING

Commands

This topic describes how to congure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.

To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer’s MAC address. You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel.

1.

Check the printer’s MAC address.

You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address, and then press the ► button.

You can also print information on the printer status, which includes the MAC address, as follows:

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.

4.


The MAC address is indicated in the printer status information in the following location.

2.

In Windows, open a command prompt or MS-DOS prompt, or in Mac OS X, start Terminal.

3.

Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses.

arp -s [IP address] [the printer’s MAC address you have veried]

Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-00-85-xx-xx-xx

Note

•

In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format “arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

00:00:85:xx:xx:xx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.

552 Network Setting


4.

Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and congure it.

ping [IP address as specied in the ARP command] -l 479

Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479

Network Setting

Note

•

In “-l,” the “l” is the letter “l”.

•

In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format “ping -s 479 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.

Note

•

The subnet mask and default gateway will be set to “0.0.0.0.”Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask and default gateway to match your network settings.



Network Setting 553

Network Setting

Specifying Printer-Related Information

Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.

Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.

5.

To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information or Security, depending on what information you want to specify.

6.

Refer to the tables of settings items for device information and security settings to complete the settings.

Device information settings items

Item

Device Name

Location

Administrator

Phone

Comments(E-mail)

Details

Specify the device name.

(0-32 characters)

Specify where the device is installed.

(0-32 characters)

Identify the administrator.

(0-32 characters)

Specify the device administrator’s contact information.

(0-32 characters)

Enter any notes from the device administrator.

(0-32 characters)

Default Setting

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

Security settings items

Item

Old Password

New Password

Conrm

Details

Enter the current device password.

(0-15 characters)

Enter a new password.

(0-15 characters)

Enter the new password again to conrm it.

(0-15 characters)

Default Setting

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

Besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as use of SNMP or IPP authentication, or an IP address to restrict printing via TCP/IP.

7.

Click OK to activate the settings.

554 Network Setting


Network Setting

Using RemoteUI

Enter the printer’s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI from the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and congure network settings.

For details on conguring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.

•

Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings (→P.549)

•

Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings (→P.572)

•

Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings (→P.557)

•

Specifying Printer-Related Information (→P.554)

Note

•

RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and other status information, and cancel print jobs.

•

By factory default, the English screen is displayed. You can change the display language after logging on by choosing the desired language in the Language list.

Important

•

Use Netscape Navigator/Communicator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later as a web browser. In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later.

•

Access is not possible via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the printer’s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)

•

Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.

•

If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are correctly congured.


Network Setting 555

Network Setting

Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors

Occur

The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can know when printing is nished or if errors occur. Receive notication via email on your mobile phone or at your computer.

Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing.

Besides being informed of nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notication when service is needed or it’s time to replace consumables.

Note

•

For details on email notication using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

556 Network Setting


Network Setting (Windows)

Network Setting (Windows)

Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.

NetWare Settings Items

Item

Frame Type

NCP Burst Mode

Print Application

Packet Signature

Bindery

PServer

File Server Name

Print Server Name

Print Server Password

Polling Interval

Details

Specify the type of frame to use in NetWare.

Default Setting

Disabled


NCP Burst Mode.

This mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, leave the setting On.

On

NDS PServer Choose the print service.

•

Bindery PServer

•

RPrinter

•

NDS PServer

•

NPrinter

Select If Requested by Server to use packet signature.

If Requested by Server

Specify the name of a le server that has a NetWare print server, up to 47 characters.

-

Specify the name of a

NetWare print server, up to 47 characters.

-

Set a password for the print server, up to 20 characters.

Specify the interval to conrm jobs.

(1-15 seconds)

-

5

Network Setting 557



Item

RPrinter Print Server Name

NDS

PServer

Printer Number

Tree Name

Context Name

Print Server Name

Print Server Password

Polling Interval

NPrinter Print Server Name

Printer Number

7.


Details



Specify the number of the printer connected to the

NetWare print server.

(0-5)

Specify the name of an NDS tree that has a NetWare print server, up to 32 characters.

-

-

0

Specify the name of a context that has a NetWare print server, up to 255 characters.



Set a password for the print server, up to 20 characters.

-

-

-

Specify the interval to conrm jobs.

(1-255 seconds)



Enter the advertising name of the print server designated by the NetWare print service.

Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of the print server.

-

Specify the number of the printer connected to the

NetWare print server.

(0-254)

Enter the printer number designated by the NetWare print service.

5

0

Default Setting

558 Network Setting



Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type

To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame type in your NetWare environment.

Follow the steps below to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the printer Control Panel.

Note

•

You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer’s IP address is congured.

Important

•

Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.

•



Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

2.


3.


4.

In the NetWare Frame Type list, select the frame type.

5.

Make sure ETHERNET II is selected under Frame Type in TCP/IP.

6.

In IP Address, enter the IP address assigned to the printer, and then enter the subnet mask in

Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address.

Important

•

You must specify the IP address here to be able to congure NetWare protocol settings using

RemoteUI.

7.

Click Set.

8.


9.



Network Setting 559


Specifying the frame type using the printer Control Panel

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.

5.


Return to the NetWare menu.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Frame Type, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button.


8.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Service, and then press the ► button.

9.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button.


10.


If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Note

•

If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

•

To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.

Important

•


560 Network Setting



Specifying NetWare Print Services

Before printing in a NetWare network, you must congure print services such as print servers, print queues, and so on. You can congure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following software.

•

NWADMIN

•

PCONSOLE

(from Novell, provided with NetWare)

Important

•

If you use NWADMIN to congure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client software) must be installed as the client software application.

•

NetWare networking is unsupported in Windows Vista.

This topic gives instructions for conguring NetWare print services. The order of this procedure may vary depending on the environment.

Choosing the type of print services

Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions as needed.

Note

•

In NetWare 5.1/6.0/6.5, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the

Novell printer gateway included with NetWare. For details on conguring NDPS, refer to the NetWare documentation.

•

NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery

NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.

•

Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode

Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.

•

Queue Server Mode

When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetWare user license is required for each network interface.

•

Remote Printer Mode

In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetWare print server. Thus, a NetWare print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.

Network Setting 561



Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server

Use NWADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NWADMIN.

2.

Run Quick Setup.

1.

Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu.

2.

Enter a desired name in Print Server Name. To use an existing print server, click the button at right and choose the name from the list.

3.

Enter a desired printer name in Name.

4.

To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use the printer in remote printer mode, choose Parallel in Type, click Communications, and set Ports to LPT1 and

Connection Type to Manual Load.

5.

Enter a desired queue name in Name.

6.

In Volume, enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.

7.

Complete other settings as needed and click OK.

Note

•

The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s network settings. Note the print server name for future reference.

•

When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number “0.” When using the printer in queue server mode, do not change the printer number from “0.”

3.

Set a password.

1.

Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details.

2.

Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.

3.

Click OK to close the password input dialog box.

4.

Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.

4.

To use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server.

To use the NetWare le server as the print server, enter “LOAD PSERVER.NLM” at the le server and press the Enter key.

Note

•

This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.

562 Network Setting



Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

Log into NetWare as Supervisor and start PCONSOLE.

2.

Switch to bindery mode.

3.

If the print server has not been created, create it.

1.

In Available Options, select Quick Setup and press the Enter key.

2.

Enter the name of the new print server, the new printer, and the queue.

Note

•

The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Note down the print server name for future reference.

4.

Specify the printer type.

1.

To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use remote printer mode, set Printer Type to Parallel and Position to Manual Load.

2.

Press the Esc key.

3.

After the conrmation message is displayed, choose Yes and press the Enter key.

5.

Set a password.

1.

In Available Options, select Print Servers and press the Enter key.

2.

Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key.

3.

Select Password, and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.

4.

Enter the password and press the Enter key.

6.

Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for conrming that PCONSOLE is nished.

7.

Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE.


Network Setting 563


Specifying NetWare Protocols

Follow the steps below to congure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI.

Note

•


1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol

Settings page.

6.

Make sure the Frame Type indicates the frame type used on the NetWare network.

7.

To use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode.

Note

•

Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, choose On.

8.

In Print Application, click the print service to be used.

Note

•

Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at the same time.

9.

For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature.

10.

Complete the following settings based on the selected service.

•

If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.

In File Server Name, enter the le server name.

2.

In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare

Print Services. (→P.561)

3.

In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in Specifying

NetWare Print Services. (→P.561)

4.

In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

•

If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.

In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in Specifying


2.

In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in Specifying NetWare Print

Services. (→P.561)

564 Network Setting



•

If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)

1.

In Tree Name and Context Name, enter the tree and context name of the print server. Do not exceed 255 characters for the context name.

2.

In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare

Print Services. (→P.561)

3.

In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in Specifying


4.

In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

•

If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)

1.

In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in Specifying

NetWare Print Services. (→P.561) Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of the print server.

2.

In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in Specifying NetWare Print

Services. (→P.561)

11.


12.

Click Reset to activate the settings.

For a list of NetWare protocol settings items, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”.

(→P.557)

Note

•

If you use RemoteUI to display the print log in RPrinter or NPrinter mode, the document and user information cannot be obtained. Thus, Document Name only indicates Unknown, and the User Name information is identied as RPRINTER/NPRINTER.


Network Setting 565


Conguring NetWare Network Settings

To print over a NetWare network, congure the network environment as follows.

Important

•


1.

Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers.

For instructions, see “Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type”. (→P.559)

2.

Specify the NetWare print services, including the print server and queue.

For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Print Services”. (→P.561)

3.

Specify NetWare protocol details besides the frame type.

For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Protocols”. (→P.564)

After you have completed the steps above, congure each computer for printing over the

NetWare network.

4.

Connect to the NetWare network.

Install NetWare client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and log in to the NetWare server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetWare and operating system documentation.

5.

Install the printer driver.

Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver, choose Network Printer as the printer destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetWare print service settings.

6.

Follow these steps to congure the printer port.

1.

Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties.

3.

Click the Port (or Advanced ) tab to display the Port (or Advanced ) sheet.

4.

As the destination port, specify the print queue created by conguring the NetWare print service settings.

Note

•

This step is not necessary if you specied the printer destination during installation of the printer driver.

566 Network Setting



Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)

This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

Important

•

If you use the printer on a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.

•

Conguring the IP Address on the Printer (→P.547)

1.


2.

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window.

3.

Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.

4.

Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.

5.

In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.

6.

Click New Port.

After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP

Printer Port Wizard.

7.

Click Next.

8.

In Printer Name or IP Address, enter the printer’s IP address.

9.

Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.

10.

Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

11.

Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports, and that the port is selected.

12.

Click OK to close the printer properties window.

Note

•

The procedure described above is the conguration based on the LPR or RAW protocol using the standard TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).


Network Setting 567


Sharing the Printer in Windows

If you set up a computer as a print server in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, the computer can receive print jobs sent from other computers (clients) connected to it for printing. This topic describes how to share the printer in Windows.

Important

•

We recommend that your network administrator congure your network for printer sharing.

1.


2.

Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Sharing to open the printer properties window.

568 Network Setting



3.

On the Sharing sheet, click Share this printer and enter the shared name.

4.

To print jobs from clients running other versions of Windows, click Additional Drivers and follow the instructions to install the printer driver of the corresponding version.

If you are prompted to choose the location of the printer driver le, insert the provided User

Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and specify the folder where the printer driver is located.

5.

Click OK.

Important

•

When installing the printer driver on client computers, select "Network Printer" on the connection type screen in the printer wizard, and then select the printer shared from the computer set up as the print server.


Network Setting 569


Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

•

In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.

3.

Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

570 Network Setting



Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility

From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Important

•


•



1.

Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2.


3.


4.

In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.

5.

Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

6.


7.


Note

•

To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.

•

You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.


Network Setting 571

Network Setting (Macintosh)

Network Setting (Macintosh)

Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings

Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.

1.




2.


3.


4.


5.

Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk

Protocol Settings page.

6.

Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.

AppleTalk Settings Items

Item

Phase Type

Name (*1)

Zone (*2)

Details

Specify whether to use AppleTalk.

If you will use AppleTalk, choose

Phase 2.

If you will not use AppleTalk, choose Disabled .

Disabled

Default Setting

Specify the object name used by

AppleTalk (in up to 31 single-byte or 15 double-byte characters).

However, do not use the following single-byte characters: @ * : =

Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)

Specify the printer zone name, up to 31 single-byte characters.

However, do not use the following single-byte characters: @ : = Also avoid using “*” (which represents the default zone) in the middle of a string.

*

*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Chooser in Mac OS 9 or Printer Setup

Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer. By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx).”

(Here, xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer’s MAC address.)

*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.

Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.

7.


572 Network Setting



Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)

Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

•

If you switch to printing in an AppleTalk network, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh)”. (→P.574)

•

If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer’s IP address is changed, see “Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.578)

•

If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see “Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh)”. (→P.582)


Network Setting 573


Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh)

To print over an AppleTalk network, activate the AppleTalk protocol and congure the destination as follows.

Activating AppleTalk on the printer

Important

•

By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select AppleTalk, and then press the ► button.

4.


5.


If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Note

•

By using RemoteUI, you can also specify the object name used by AppleTalk, as well as the printer zone name.


Important

•


574 Network Setting


Conguring the Destination (Mac OS 9)

1.

Choose Chooser from the Apple menu to display the Chooser window.

2.

In AppleTalk, click Active.


3.

Close the Chooser window.

4.

Click AppleTalk under Control Panels to display the AppleTalk window.

5.

In Connect via, choose Built-in Ethernet.

6.

Close the AppleTalk window and save the settings.

7.


8.

In the list at left, click GARO Printer Driver.

9.

In the Destination list at right, select AppleTalk, and then select the printer in the list below.

10.

Close the Chooser window and click OK after the conrmation message is displayed.

Network Setting 575



Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)

Note

•

The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.

In System Preferences, click Network to display the Network window.

2.

In Show, choose Built-in Ethernet. Next, click AppleTalk, select Make AppleTalk Active, and click Apply now.

3.

Close the Network window and save the settings.

4.

Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.

5.

Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.

6.

If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.

576 Network Setting



7.

Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.


Network Setting 577


Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network

(Macintosh)

Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.

Important

•

If you use the printer on TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.

•

Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.551)

Conguring the Destination (Mac OS 9)

1.


2.

In the list at left, click GARO Printer Driver.

3.

Click Registering IP Address in the Destination list to display the IP Address Register/Edit dialog box.

578 Network Setting


4.

Enter the printer’s IP address in IP Address and click Add.


5.

Click OK to close the IP Address Register/Edit dialog box.

6.

In the Destination list, click the address you registered.

7.

Close the Chooser window and click OK after the conrmation message is displayed.

Network Setting 579



Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)

Note

•

The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X. If you use other versions, refer to the help for the Printer

Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).

1.


2.


3.

Click Add to display the Printer Browser window.

4.

Click More Printers.

580 Network Setting


5.

In the list of connection methods, click Canon IP(iPF).


6.

Enter the printer’s IP address in Printer’s Address and click Add.

7.

Make sure the printer has been added, and then close the Printer List window.


Network Setting 581


Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh)

In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later, use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.

Note

•

In Mac OS 9, if the computer’s TCP/IP settings have been congured, you can connect the printer to the network as easily as with the Bonjour function.

Select IP Print (Auto) from the Destination list in Chooser to specify the destination.

Important

•

Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

•

By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. The printer name as displayed in Chooser in Mac

OS 9 or Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X is predened as the Multicast DNS

Service Name. You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using

RemoteUI. For instructions on changing it, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.555)

1.


2.


3.

If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.

582 Network Setting



4.

Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.


Network Setting 583

Adjusting the Printhead

Maintenance

Adjusting the Printhead

Correcting Print Misalignment

If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the

Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.

For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically”. (→P.584)

For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.586)

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically


Printhead alignment automatically or manually by printing and reading a test pattern.

There are two modes for automatic adjustment: Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj. Standard Adj. will x most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Advanced Adj.

If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the

Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.586)

Follow these steps for standard automatic adjustment of the Printhead.

1.

When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger ready when Standard

Adj. is selected or 8 when Advanced Adj. is selected.

When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.

•

Loading Sheets Manually (→P.156)

•

Loading Rolls on the Roll Paper Holder (→P.116)

•

Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit (→P.119)

Note

•

Use Standard Adj. if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries between colors to appear as attractive as possible.

•

Use Advanced Adj. to ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the printhead or if you want printed documents to appear as vivid as possible. We recommend using

Advanced Adj. for printing at a higher level of image quality.

•

Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

•

We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

•

This function is not available for CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, or CAD Clear

Film. If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent lm or similar media, try another type of media or adjust the Printhead alignment manually. (→P.586)

584 Maintenance



2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Head Adj., and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.

6.


A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.

After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the Printhead alignment.

Note

•

If paper is fed automatically and no roll is loaded, select the media source and click the OK button.


Maintenance 585


Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually


Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.

You can adjust the Printhead alignment automatically or manually. Normally, choose automatic adjustment. If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead

Alignment Automatically”. (→P.584)

Follow these steps for standard manual adjustment of the Printhead.

Note

•

If Manual Head Adj is unusable although displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Adj. in Auto Head

Adj. Manual Head Adj is available in the menu after you try Auto Head Adj. once.

1.

When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4-sized or larger ready.


•


•


•


Note

•


•

We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Head Adj, and then press the ► button.

5.


A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D, and then press the ► button.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1, and then press the ► button.

586 Maintenance



8.

Examine test pattern D-1 for printhead adjustment. After you determine the pattern with straight lines, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

If lines seem straightest in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

9.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-5 and D-7 to D-11.

10.

Press the ◄ button.

11.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting, and then press the ► button.

12.


The printer now goes online.


Maintenance 587


Adjusting the Printhead Height

If printed documents rub against the printer during printing or if the edge of paper is wrinkled from rubbing, it may help to raise the Printhead.

If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead height, and then press the OK button.

588 Maintenance


Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed. There are two modes for adjusting the amount paper is fed, Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj. Advanced Adj. offers a wider range of adjustment than Standard Adj. If using Standard Adj. does not eliminate streaks, or if streaks are quite noticeable, try Advanced Adj.

Follow the steps below for standard automatic adjustment of the feed amount.

When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, you must adjust the feed amount manually. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually”.

(→P.592)

Note

•

To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount. (→P.596)

•

This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.

Important

•

Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.

•

To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band

Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.173)

Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.

Maintenance 589



Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount automatically.

1.

Load one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger when Standard Adj. is selected or two when

Advanced Adj. is selected.


•

Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P.80)

•

Loading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed Slot (→P.85)

Note

•

Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Band Adj., and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard Adj. or Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.

6.


A test pattern is printed for band adjustment.

After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the feed amount and returns to online mode.

Note

•

If paper is fed automatically and no roll is loaded, select the media source and click the OK button.

•

In some cases, the feed amount cannot be adjusted automatically. If so, choose Advanced Adj. in Auto Band Adj. (→P.49)

•

If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.591)

590 Maintenance



Adjusting the feed amount during printing

If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears every 40 mm (1.6 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different.

1.

Press the Online button to pause printing.

2.

Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the OK button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

The supported range is -5 to +5.

5.

Press the Online button to resume printing.

Note

•

The Fine Band Adj. value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, if you adjust the feed amount (manually or automatically), the Fine Band Adj. value is reset to 0.

Maintenance 591



Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.

This topic describes how to adjust the feed amount manually.

When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, adjust the feed amount manually. We recommend automatic adjustment for other types of media. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically”. (→P.589)

Note

•

To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount. (→P.596)

Important

•


•

To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band

Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.173)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.

592 Maintenance



Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount manually.

1.

When using sheets, load two unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger.


•


•


Note

•

Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Band Adj, and then press the ► button.

5.


Test pattern A is printed for band adjustment.

6.

Examine test pattern A for band adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

Test pattern B is printed for band adjustment.

Note

•

If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

7.

Examine test pattern B for band adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

The feed amount is adjusted, and the printer goes online.

If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.594)

Maintenance 593



Adjusting the feed amount during printing

If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears every 40 mm (1.6 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. The results of adjustment are applied to printing in progress, enabling you to check the results immediately. However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different.

1.

Press the Online button to pause printing.

2.

Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the OK button.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.

Note

•

The supported range is -5 to +5.

5.


Note

•

The Fine Band Adj. adjustment value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, if you adjust the Printhead alignment, the Fine Band Adj. value is reset to 0.

594 Maintenance



Adjusting the Vacuum Strength

When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if paper rubs against the printer or the edge is wrinkled from rubbing, adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results.

1.


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of suction against paper on the Platen, and then press the

OK button.


Maintenance 595


Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy

To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed amount.

Note

•

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.

(→P.592)

Important

•


•

To apply the results of adjusting the measurement scale for better accuracy in printing, you must rst set

Feed Priority to Print Length. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Line Drawing/Text. (→P.173)


1.


2.


3.


4.


5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Length or Automatic, and then press the OK button.

596 Maintenance



Follow these steps to adjust the scale for better accuracy.

1.

When using sheets, load one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger.


•


•


•


Note

•

When loading paper, specify the correct paper type. When the paper type is not specied, the printing quality may be affected without the correct adjustment of the feeding.

•

We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length, and then press the ► button.

5.


A test pattern is printed for adjustment based on the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage.

The scale bar shows “Millimeter” in 50 mm units and “Inch” in 1 inch units.

6.

Measure the length of the adjustment pattern. Calculate the difference between the measured length and actual length. Enter it as a percentage and press the OK button.

You can adjust the value in 0.02% increments. Press ▲ to increase the value and ▼ to decrease it.

If the scale is printed shorter than actual size, set the value toward the positive side; if it is printed longer, set the value toward the negative side.

Note

•

You can also specify the adjustment value by selecting Paper Details → Adjust. Setting.

Maintenance 597



Adjusting Color on the Trailing Edge of Sheets

If printed sheets are affected by banding in different colors toward the end of the sheet (about 20-30 mm from the edge), try adjusting the feed amount of the trailing edge of sheets.

Note

•

If printed documents (including documents printed on rolls) are affected by banding in different colors not only toward the end of the sheet but throughout the printed area, try adjusting the overall feed amount. (→P.589)

•

This adjustment is only possible when feeding paper from the Top Paper Feed Slot that can be set up with a margin on the trailing edge of 3 mm (0.12 in). If you use paper for which you cannot specify a trailing margin of 3 mm, it will be automatically ejected, and adjustment is not possible.

1.

Load a sheet of unused paper A4/Letter-sized or larger.

Note

•


•

We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adj Far Ed Feed, and then press the ► button.

5.


A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

C1 is displayed on the Control Panel.

6.

Examine test pattern C1 for adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press the ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

C2 is displayed on the Control Panel.

598 Maintenance



7.

Examine test pattern C2 for adjustment. After you determine the pattern in which streaks are least noticeable, press the ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.

The printer now goes back online.

Note

•

If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value. For example, choose 17 if you cannot decide whether pattern 16 or 18 is better.


Maintenance 599

Color adjustment

Color adjustment

Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors

Color calibration is a feature that compensates for changes in color from individual variation among Printhead or from the printing environment, ensuring better color consistency.

We recommend using color calibration in the following situations.

•

After initial installation

•

After Printhead replacement

•

If colors seem different from before (however, make sure you are printing under the same conditions and in the same printing environment)

•

When consistent color is desired from multiple printers (in this case, also use the same version of

rmware and printer driver and the same settings.)

When you execute color calibration, a test pattern is printed and an adjustment value is automatically set based on the results of printing.

Important

•

Before executing color calibration, you must prepare one of the following types of paper. Note that various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. Use the printer under the recommended environmental conditions for the paper to be used. For details on recommended environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.108)

Paper Compatible With

Color Calibration

Japan Europe Americas

Matte Coated 90

Compatible Compatible

HW Coated

Premium MatteP

Matte Photo

GlossyPhoto 190

SatinPhoto 190

GlossyPhoto 240

SatinPhoto 240

Glossy Photo

HW GlossyPhoto2

HW SemiGlPhoto2

Photo PaperPlus

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

-

-

-

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

FineArt Photo

FneArt HW Photo

Comm Proong

-

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

600 Maintenance


Color adjustment

RC Proong 210

Proong Paper

Opaque Paper

Art Extr Smooth

-

-

-

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible

Compatible -

Compatible

-

Compatible

•

Optimal adjustment values from color calibration are also applied for paper other than the type you use to execute color calibration when printing on that other type of paper.

•

In the printer driver or in the MAIN MENU of the Control Panel, you can specify whether to apply the adjustment value from color calibration when printing. The printer driver settings are given priority.

For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

For information on printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

•

Printer Driver Settings (Windows) (→P.441)

•

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) (→P.492)

•

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9) (→P.517)

•

Before color calibration, ensure the printer is not exposed to direct sunlight or other strong sources of light.

•

If you reinstall the printer driver and change the region selection of the Media Conguration Tool, region-specic paper information originally registered on the printer before installation will be deleted. If the information of paper you used for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper. To apply the results of color calibration, perform color calibration again using paper supported in the newly selected region and compatible with color calibration. See the Media

Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh)

•

Default settings will be restored if you select MAIN MENU > System Setup > Reset PaprSetngs > Yes.

Because information added or updated using the Media Conguration Tool is also deleted, if paper of which information was added using the Media Conguration Tool was used for color calibration and is now deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper. To apply the results of color calibration, perform color calibration again using a paper included originally in the default settings that is compatible with color calibration. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).

Note

•

For further adjustment of the color of documents as printed applying color calibration, adjust the color in the printer driver. (→P.184)

•

You can check when color calibration was executed and what paper was used from Status Print, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows) or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (on a Macintosh computer) in the MAIN MENU on the Control Panel.

For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)

For details on imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

For details on imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.

Maintenance 601


Color adjustment

Follow these steps to execute color calibration.

1.

Load paper compatible with color calibration.

When using sheets, load paper A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.5×11 in) vertical, or larger. One sheet is required.


•


•


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Calibration, and then press ►.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Adjust, and then press the ► button.

6.


After the printer measures environmental conditions and checks the paper, a test pattern for color calibration is printed. An adjustment value based on the results of printing is set automatically.

After adjustment is complete, the printer goes online or ofine automatically.

602 Maintenance


Color adjustment

Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing

Environment

You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.

There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.


On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing.

Important

•


•


•


For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:

•

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing (Windows) (→P.604)



Important

•


•


•


Tool.

•


For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:

•

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (→P.608)


Maintenance 603

Color adjustment


(Windows)

Print Charts, note the number of the chart with your desired color tone, and enter this number in the printer driver before printing.

Important

•


•


1.


2.


3.


4.

In the

A

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo

Paper).

Important

•

Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For details, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.108)

604 Maintenance


5.

Click

D


Color adjustment

6.

In

F

Print Quality, click Highest or High.

Important

•

Ambient Light Matching mode is only available when the

F

Print Quality is set to Highest or High.

7.


G


8.

Click

H


9.


10.

Click Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the

A

Matching Mode list.

11.

Conrm that By selecting a chart number is selected in

C

Setting Method.

If it is not selected already, select it.


Maintenance 605

Color adjustment

12.

Click

D

Print Chart.

Light Source Check Tool now starts up.

13.

Check the settings and click Print.

The Chart is printed.

14.

In the viewing environment, determine the number of the set of images on the Chart in which all four vertical images have the best overall color tone.

Note

•

Choose the number of the set of images in which the people, the blue of the sky, and the red of the strawberries look the most natural overall.

606 Maintenance


Color adjustment

15.

After conrming that Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in

A

Matching

Mode, select the number for the desired color tone on the chart in

E

Chart Number.

16.

Click OK.

17.



Maintenance 607

Color adjustment



Important

•


•


•


Tool.

1.

Using the Eye-One spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool, determine the

Lighting Source Type and Color Temperature in the viewing environment.

Note

•

For detailed instructions on Eye-One and the Light Source Measure Tool, refer to the provided instructions.

2.


3.


4.


5.

In the

A

Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo

Paper).

Important

•

Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) may not be available, depending on the type of paper used. For details, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.108)

608 Maintenance


6.

Click

D


Color adjustment

7.

In

F

Print Quality, click Highest or High.

Important

•

Ambient Light Matching mode is only available when the

F

Print Quality is set to Highest or High.

8.


G


9.

Click

H


10.


11.

Click Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the

A

Matching Mode list.


Maintenance 609

Color adjustment

12.

Select By entering values directly in

C

Setting Method.

13.

Select the

F

Lighting Source Type and

G

Color Temperature determined in step 1.

14.

Click OK.

15.


610 Maintenance


Color adjustment


Applications (Windows)

1.

Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.

Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

Note

•

The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.

In the following case, click Preferences.

■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software



Note

•

The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed.

Maintenance 611


Color adjustment

Important

•

If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.

•

You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.

see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.149)

612 Maintenance


Ink Tanks

Ink Tank

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the side.

When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “H” is printed on the label, along with the following Ink Tank part numbers.

•

Y Ink Tank PFI-101Y

•

PC Ink Tank PFI-101PC

•

C Ink Tank PFI-101C

•

PGY Ink Tank PFI-103PGY

•

GY Ink Tank PFI-103GY

•

BK Ink Tank PFI-103BK

•

PM Ink Tank PFI-101PM

•

M Ink Tank PFI-101M

•

MBK Ink Tank PFI-103MBK

•

R Ink Tank PFI-101R

•

G Ink Tank PFI-101G

•

B Ink Tank PFI-101B

130 ml per color

Ink Tanks

Note

•

For instructions on replacing Ink Tank, see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.614)


Maintenance 613

Ink Tanks

Replacing Ink Tanks

Compatible Ink Tank

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the side.

Request an Ink Tank with the same label when you purchase a new Ink Tank. For more information, see “Ink

Tank”. (→P.613)

Precautions when handling an Ink Tank

Take the following precautions when handling an Ink Tank.

Caution

•

For safety, keep an Ink Tank out of the reach of children.

•

If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

Important

•

Before removing an Ink Tank from the pouch for installation, shake it gently seven or eight times. If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.

•

Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

•

Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

•

There may be ink around the ink holes of Ink Tank you remove. Handle an Ink Tank carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

•

We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal.

Using an old Ink Tank may affect the printing quality.

•

Do not remove the Ink Tank if the printer is not used for a long period (a month or more). Ink remaining in the printer may become clogged and cause of printing problems.

•

Coverage may be uneven if you replace the ink during a print job.

614 Maintenance


Replacing an Ink Tank

1.


You can replace Ink Tank if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Online or Ofine, or if messages advise you to check the amount of ink left or replace the Ink Tank.

Ink Tanks

If a message prompts you to replace the Ink Tank, press the OK button. Steps 2 and 3 are unnecessary in this case. Go to step 4 and remove the Ink Tank.

Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printing or printhead cleaning.

Note

•

Ink Tank replacement is possible even when print jobs are being canceled or if paper is being fed.

2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the ► button.

4.


A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Next, remove the

Ink Tank.

Maintenance 615


Ink Tanks

5.

Open the Ink Tank Cover and check the Ink Lamp.

The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.

6.

Press the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement and lift the Ink Tank Lock

Lever to open it.

616 Maintenance


7.

Hold the empty Ink Tank by the grip to remove it, and press the OK button.

Ink Tanks

Note

•

If there is still some ink left in the Ink Tank you removed, store the ink tank with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.

•

Dispose of used Ink Tank according to local regulations.

8.

Before opening the pouch, shake the Ink Tank gently seven or eight times. Agitate the ink in the

Ink Tank by slowly turning the Ink Tank upside-down and right side up several times.

Note

•

If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.

Maintenance 617


Ink Tanks

9.

Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.

Note

•

Never touch the ink holes or metal contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect printing quality.

•

Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

•

Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

10.

Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown in the gure, with the ink holes down.

Important

•

Ink Tank cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is wrong.

If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the

Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it.

618 Maintenance


Ink Tanks

11.

Close the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it clicks.

12.

Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.

Note

•

Ink Lamp ashes when there is little ink left.

13.

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

The printer returns to the mode before replacement of Ink Tank.


Maintenance 619

Ink Tanks

Checking Ink Tank Levels

On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the Ink Tank.

The Display Screen indicates the remaining ink levels, unless a message is displayed.

During messages, press the Information button to view the ink levels on the Display Screen.

These levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the Color Label on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have deactivated ink level detection.

The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (→P.614)

620 Maintenance


Ink Tanks

When to Replace Ink Tanks

Replace or prepare to replace Ink Tank in the following situations.

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen

When there is little ink left, the Message lamp is lit and Ink Level: Check is shown on the Display Screen.

You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (→P.620)

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink

If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When ink runs out, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the

Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.


Maintenance 621

Printheads

Printheads

Printhead

This is a replacement Printhead for the printer.

•

Printhead PF-03

Note

•

For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.625)

Checking the Print Quality

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

For instructions, see “Checking for Nozzle Clogging”. (→P.623)

Improving the Print Quality

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles. Clean the Printhead if the printed test pattern was faint.

For instructions on cleaning the Printhead, see “Cleaning the Printhead”. (→P.624)

622 Maintenance


Checking for Nozzle Clogging

If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Printheads

Note

•

You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle checking every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)

1.

Load unused paper.

•


•


2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check, and then press the ► button.

5.


The printer goes online and prints a test pattern.

6.

Check the printing results.

If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.

If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors are clogged.

If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle clogging.

1.

Clean the Printhead. (→P.624)

2.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

•

If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact your Canon dealer.

Maintenance 623


Printheads

Cleaning the Printhead

Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.

Note

•

You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)

•


•

Printhead cleaning is not possible if POP Board (1.5 mm [0.06 in] thick) is loaded in the Front Paper

Feed Slot. Remove the paper before cleaning.


1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.

•

Head Cleaning A

Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about four minutes to complete.

•

Head Cleaning B

Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about ve minutes to complete.

The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.

4.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (→P.623)

Note

•

If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two or three times. If this still does not improve printing, the

Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.

Caution

•

Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.

624 Maintenance


Printheads

Replacing the Printhead

When to replace the Printhead

This printer uses two Printheads.

Replace one or both Printheads in the following situations.

•

If the printing quality does not improve even after two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu

Replace both Printheads, one at a time.

•

If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the left printhead.

Replace the left Printhead.

•

If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the right printhead.

Replace the right Printhead.

•

If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead

Replace the Printhead that your dealer advised you to replace.

Compatible Printhead

For information on the compatible Printhead, see “Printhead”. (→P.622)

Precautions when handling the Printhead

Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.

Caution

•

For safety, keep the Printhead in a place inaccessible for children.

•


•

Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and there is a risk of burns.

Important

•

Avoid dropping or shaking the Printhead. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

•

There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

•

Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead from the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles may dry out, which may affect printing quality.

•

If you need to store a Printhead temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal contacts (→P.629) facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the printing quality.

•

Never attempt to take apart or modify a Printhead. This may damage the printer.

•

Never touch the Printhead nozzles or the metal contacts. This may cause printing problems.

Maintenance 625


Printheads

Replacing the Printhead

Follow the steps below to replace the Printhead. Failure to follow this procedure may cause ink leak from the Printhead, which may cause stains.

Note

•

Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.

•

Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new

Printhead for replacement.

•

Choose On in Auto Print to have the printer automatically adjust the Printhead alignment after replacement of the Printhead. (→P.49)

1.

If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it.

(→P.421)

2.

Clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.640)

3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head, and then press the ► button.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead for replacement, and then press the ► button.

7.


Select Printhead L to replace the Printhead L or select Printhead R to replace the Printhead

R. Be sure to specify the correct printhead.

Ink is now lled.

After about three minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open the Top Cover.

8.

Open the Top Cover.

Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.

626 Maintenance


Printheads

9.

If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

Important

•

Never touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).

•

Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.

10.

Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.

Maintenance 627


Printheads

11.

Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.

12.

Remove the used Printhead.

Caution

•

When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching these parts.

Note

•

Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.

628 Maintenance


13.

Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the case.

Printheads

Important

•

When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or the metal contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.

14.

While rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange

Safety Cap 1 (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Safety Cap 2 (b) and pull it down to remove it.

Important

•

Safety Cap 1 (a) may be coated with ink to protect the Printhead. Be careful not to touch areas other than the grips.

•

Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.

•

The inside surface of Safety Cap 2 (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Handle it carefully to avoid touching the nozzles or spilling ink. Spilled ink may cause stains. The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles. If this ink is accidentally spilled, it may stain the printer or surrounding area.

We recommend removing the Safety Cap 2 (b) on top of the Printhead package or safely out of the way. Wipe off any spilled ink with a dry cloth. This ink is non-toxic.

•

Do not reattach the Safety Cap or protective material. Dispose of these materials in accordance with local regulations.

Maintenance 629


Printheads

15.

With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into the Carriage. Making sure that the metal contacts do not touch the Carriage, carefully push the printhead rmly into the carriage.

16.

Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.

17.

Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.

630 Maintenance


Printheads

18.


Ink now lls the system.

After about ten minutes, the Printhead alignment will be automatically adjusted, and the printer will go online.

If no paper has been loaded, a message is displayed requesting you to load paper.

Important

•

Never remove an Ink Tank while the system is lling with ink.

•

If Auto Print is Off in the printer menu, the Printhead alignment will not be adjusted. In this case, adjust the alignment after Printhead replacement by accessing Auto Head Adj. in Advanced

Adj. (→P.584)


Maintenance 631

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

This is a replacement Maintenance Cartridge for the printer.

•

Maintenance Cartridge MC-16

Note

•

For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see “Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge”.

(→P.632)

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Compatible Maintenance Cartridge

For information on the compatible Maintenance Cartridge, see “Maintenance Cartridge”. (→P.632)

Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge

Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.

Caution

•

For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.

•


Important

•

Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.

•

To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

•

Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance

Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

•

Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

632 Maintenance



Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

1.


You can replace the Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Ofine or if messages advise you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

If a message prompts you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, press the OK button. Steps 2 and 3 are unnecessary in this case. Go to step 4 and remove the Maintenance Cartridge.

Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, during Printhead cleaning, or while ink is being lled.

If you pause printing to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, it may cause the printed images to be blurry.

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart, and then press the ► button.

5.


6.

Remove the Ejection Guide.

Maintenance 633



7.

Hold the handle (a) of the used Maintenance Cartridge and pull out the cartridge. Grasp the handles on both sides (b) and keep the cartridge level as you remove it.

Important

•

Used Maintenance Cartridge is heavy. Always grasp the cartridge handles on both sides rmly and keep the cartridge level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle, ink may leak and cause stains.

•

The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used

Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

8.

Open the plastic bag of the new Maintenance Cartridge and remove the packaging material.

Holding the handles on both sides (a), remove the cartridge.

Important

•

Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.

634 Maintenance



9.

Keeping the used Maintenance Cartridge level, put it in the plastic bag that was in the box, as shown.

10.

Expel air in the plastic bag and seal the zipper. Fold the plastic bag in half.

11.

Put the used Maintenance Cartridge and packaging material in the box for storage, just like the new Maintenance Cartridge was, keeping it level.

Important

•

Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a at surface.

Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

•

In accordance with its active and ongoing policy to protect the environment, Canon collects used

Maintenance Cartridge. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge.

Maintenance 635



12.

Holding the handles on both sides of the new Maintenance Cartridge (a), insert it completely, keeping it level.

13.

Hold the Ejection Guide on both sides by the near end. Aligning the Ejection Guide with the guides (a), insert it into the printer until it locks in place.

14.


The printer returns to the mode before replacement of the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message is displayed advising you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, printing is not possible. Make sure that the Maintenance Cartridge is installed correctly.

If a print job was in progress when the Maintenance Cartridge was replaced, printing is resumed.

Important

•

Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during about the rst ve seconds after the printer goes back online. This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.

•

If you replace the Maintenance Cartridge when the printer is off, do not remove the Maintenance

Cartridge during about the rst ve seconds after you turn the printer on again after replacement.

This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.

636 Maintenance



Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity

The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other processes. You can conrm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the

Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.

Press the Information button to display the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge on the Display

Screen.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (→P.632)


Maintenance 637


When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge

Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.

If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low, the Message lamp is lit and Prepare for maint cart

replacement. is displayed. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (→P.637)

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted

Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the

Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.) To check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, press the Information button. Replace the Maintenance

Cartridge and perform related maintenance as needed.

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message lamp ashes and a message to replace the

Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the

Printhead or transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.

638 Maintenance


Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning the Printer Exterior

Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

About once a month, clean the printer exterior.

1.


2.

Unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Cleaning the Printer

Caution

•

Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.

3.

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe the exterior surfaces of the printer.

Dry the surfaces with a dry cloth.

Caution

•

Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.

Important

•

If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

4.

Plug the power cord into the outlet.

Maintenance 639



Cleaning Inside the Top Cover

Clean inside the Top Cover about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.

•

If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing

•

After you have used up a roll

•

After borderless printing

•

After printing on small paper

•

After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris

•

If you have replaced the roll

•

After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust

Important

•

If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend always cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

•

If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Clean Platen, and then press the ► button.

4.


5.

Open the Top Cover.

640 Maintenance



6.

If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing

Ink Grooves (b), use the Cleaning Brush, provided with the printer, to wipe it away.

Note

•

If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.

7.

Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it.

Wipe away any ink residue on the Platen as a whole, the Paper Retainer, and the Borderless

Printing Ink Grooves.


Maintenance 641


Important

•

Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may attract dust and affect the printing quality.

•

Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.

•


8.


642 Maintenance



Cleaning the Paper Retainer

Clean the Paper Retainer about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

Also clean the Paper Retainer in the following situations to ensure the printer offers a comfortable working environment.

•

If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing

•

After printing on small paper

Caution

•

During cleaning, use a type of paper that does not generate much dust from cutting, such as Plain

Paper. It may affect printing quality if you use lm or other media that are more likely to generate debris when cut, or that have a surface nish that may come off.

1.


2.

Unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Caution

•

Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning and maintenance. Accidentally leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.

3.

Remove the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.147)

4.

Fold a sheet of Plain Paper two or three times (a) and insert it under the Paper Retainer (b) behind the printer to wipe the entire surface of the Paper Retainer clean.

5.

Reinstall the Roll Feed Unit. (→P.148)

6.

Plug the power cord into the outlet.

Maintenance 643



Cleaning Spurs Used in Paper Feeding

If white dots about 1 mm (0.039 in) apart appear on printed documents in the direction paper is fed, clean the spurs.

During spur cleaning, a Cleaning sheet fed from the Top Paper Feed Slot is repeatedly advanced and retracted to clean the spurs (a).

Note

•

Use the provided Cleaning sheet for spur cleaning.

•

If the spurs are quite soiled, executing cleaning once may not be enough to clean them completely.

Execute cleaning again if one time is not effective.

•

If a roll is loaded, rewind the roll before this procedure. (→P.146)

Important

•

Do not fold the Cleaning sheet.

•

Do not use a frayed Cleaning sheet or Cleaning sheet that has become very dirty.

•

If the Cleaning sheet is warped, straighten it before use.

•

To cancel cleaning, press the Stop button.

1.


2.


3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spur Cleaning, and then press the ► button.

4.


644 Maintenance


5.

Open the Paper Tray Cover (a).

6.

Squeeze the Width Guide (a) and slide it all the way to the left.


7.

Remove the Cleaning sheet from the pouch.

The pouch is used to store the Cleaning Sheet, so keep it in a safe place.

8.

Insert the long side of the Cleaning sheet in the Top Paper Feed Slot in the position to be cleaned.

Insert the Cleaning sheet gently until it stops.


Maintenance 645


Note

•

If the width of the paper used when soiling occurred is wider than the Cleaning sheet, insert the sheet in different positions as you perform cleaning.

9.

Press the OK button to start cleaning.

Cleaning takes about a minute and a half.

10.

Pull out the cleaning sheet and press OK. is shown on the Control Panel. At this point, pull out the Cleaning sheet and press the OK button.

11.

Put the Cleaning Sheet back in the pouch.

12.

Close the Paper Tray Cover (a).

646 Maintenance




Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.

Note

•

You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)

•


•

Printhead cleaning is not possible if POP Board (1.5 mm [0.06 in] thick) is loaded in the Front Paper

Feed Slot. Remove the paper before cleaning.


1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.

•

Head Cleaning A

Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about four minutes to complete.

•

Head Cleaning B

Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about ve minutes to complete.

The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.

4.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (→P.623)

Note

•

If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two or three times. If this still does not improve printing, the

Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.

Caution

•

Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.

Maintenance 647


Other Maintenance

Other Maintenance

Preparing to Transfer the Printer

To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow the steps below before transferring the printer to a new location. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.

Note

•

It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen prompts you to replace the

Maintenance Cartridge or check the remaining capacity. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before transfer preparations. (→P.632)

•

Do not tilt the printer in transit. Ink inside the printer may leak and cause stains. If it is necessary to stand the printer up or tilt it, contact your Canon dealer.

1.

Remove the paper.

•

Rolls

1.

Removing Rolls from the Roll Feed Unit (→P.122)

2.

Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder (→P.118)

•

Sheet

1.

Removing Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot (→P.164)

2.

Removing Heavyweight Paper from the Front Paper Feed Slot (→P.165)

2.


3.


4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Move Printer, and then press the ► button.

5.


The printer now starts preparing for transfer.

If a message is shown on the Display Screen requesting you to open the Ink Tank Cover, follow the procedure starting with step 6.

6.

Open the Ink Tank Cover.

648 Maintenance


7.

Open the Ink Tank Lock Lever and remove every Ink Tank.

Other Maintenance

Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.

Note

•

Store the Ink Tank you removed with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

8.

Close every Ink Tank Lock Lever, and close the Ink Tank Cover.

At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.

Important

•

Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.

When the suction is nished, Turn Power Off!! is displayed.


Maintenance 649

Other Maintenance

9.

Press the Power button and turn off the printer.

Important

•

Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the Ink Tanks, wait until the printer comes online, and follow this procedure again.

10.

Disconnect the power cord and interface cable.

11.

Open the Top Cover.

12.

Grasp the Belt, insert it between the Belt Stopper, and afx the Belt Stopper to the Carriage Shaft.

650 Maintenance


Important

•


Other Maintenance

Note

•

Here, the Belt Stopper is the one that was removed and stored after initial installation.

13.


14.

Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.

15.

Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in shipping materials, and then package them in a shipping box.


Maintenance 651

Other Maintenance

Updating the Firmware

Update the printer rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.

Conrming the rmware version

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press ►.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info, and then press the ► button.

The rmware version is displayed.

Updating the rmware

To obtain the latest rmware, visit the Canon website. If the rmware available online is newer than the installed rmware, update the printer rmware. For details on downloading and updating the rmware, visit the Canon website.

652 Maintenance


Frequently Asked Questions

Troubleshooting

Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the hyperlinks in the answer column.

Question Answer

How do I print on a roll?

When printing on rolls, after loading the roll, specify the paper type and length, both on the Control Panel and in the printer driver.

⇒


How do I print manually?

When printing manually, specify the paper type and size in the printer driver, and then load the paper.

⇒

Loading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed

Slot (→P.85)

How do I switch between printing on a roll and printing manually?

How do I change the paper type or size?

How do I cut the roll paper after printing?

How do I print without borders?

Press the Feeder Selection button to switch the paper source between the roll and a sheet.

⇒

Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source (→P.115)

⇒

Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source (→P.154)

Specify the type and size of paper, both on the

Control Panel and in the printer driver.

•

Specifying it in the Printer Driver

⇒

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (→P.655)

•

Specifying it on the Control Panel

Selecting the paper type

⇒

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.124)

⇒


Selecting the Paper Size

⇒

Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) (→P.125)

⇒

Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet) (→P.163)

You can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll, and you can cut rolls at a desired position.

⇒

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls (→P.129)

Borderless printing is possible on rolls. You can also specify borderless printing in the printer driver by adjusting the original size to match the paper size.

Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

⇒

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size

(→P.297)

⇒

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the

Roll Width (→P.299)

⇒


Troubleshooting 653



Question Answer

How do I print an A4 original enlarged on A2 paper?

In the printer driver, you can adjust the original image to match the paper size or width, or you can specify enlargement or reduction before printing as desired.

⇒

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

(→P.244)

⇒


⇒

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

(→P.246)

How do I print without wasting paper?

To conserve paper, you can specify in the printer driver to rotate originals 90 degrees or to print without top and bottom margins.

⇒

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90

Degrees (→P.395)

⇒

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals

Without Top and Bottom Margins (→P.396)

How do I print without wasting all the blank space on the right side when printing an A4-sized original at A3 size?

By specifying to rotate originals 90 degrees in the printer driver, you can print at A4 size to ll the width of A3 paper.

⇒


Degrees (→P.395)

How do I print in landscape (or portrait) orientation?

You can print originals that are in landscape (or portrait) orientation automatically enlarged to t the roll width. This is an easy way to create vertical or horizontal banners.

⇒

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners

(Large-Format Printing) (→P.330)

How do I print on a custom paper size?

How do I register custom paper sizes?

How do I print lines thicker?

How do I modify how colors are printed?

How do I use printer driver settings again in subsequent jobs?

You can specify custom sizes temporarily in the printer driver.

⇒

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.331)

You can add desired sizes (Custom Media Sizes) in the Size Options dialog box of the printer driver.

⇒

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.331)

By specifying Thicken Fine Lines in the printer driver, you can print ne lines thicker to make them easier to see.

⇒

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and

Colors for Printing (→P.173)

To compensate for changes in color from individual variation among Printheads or from the printing environment and to ensure better color consistency, execute color calibration.

⇒

Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors (→P.600)

You can adjust colors even further in the printer driver before printing.

⇒


By saving settings information in a favorite, you can apply the settings again before printing anytime as needed.

⇒

Using Favorites (→P.421)

654 Troubleshooting



Question

How do I use the printer in combination with a Color

imageRUNNER ?

How do I print enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER ?

Answer

The printer can be used for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color

imageRUNNER .

⇒

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (→P.247)

By using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

(iR enlargement copy), you can automatically print enlargements of scanned originals from a Color

imageRUNNER .

⇒

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (→P.247)

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.

For instructions on conguring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

•


•


•



Troubleshooting 655

Printing does not start

Printing does not start

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up

Cause

The printer is not on.

Corrective Action

Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the

Power button to turn the printer on.

The printer is not selected in the printer driver. (The printer is in

Sleep mode.)

The print job is paused. (The printer is in Sleep mode.)

In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in the printing dialog box and try printing again.

In Mac OS X, select the printer by clicking Printer Setup Utility (or

Print Center ) and try printing again.

In Mac OS 9, select the printer in Chooser and try printing again.

In Windows, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.

2.

Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.

In Mac OS X, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Open the Printer Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).

2.

Select the printer, and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to restart the print job.

In Mac OS 9, restart the print job as follows.

1.

Open imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .

2.

Choose Resume Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.

The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent

Cause

The printer is ofine.


Press the Online button on the Control Panel to bring the printer online.

The Display Screen indicates the system is lling with ink

Cause

When the printer was turned off previously, some cleaning operation was terminated.


Wait until the system has been lled with ink. This process may take about ten minutes.

656 Troubleshooting


Cannot print over a network

Cannot print over a network

Cannot connect the printer to the network

Corrective Action Cause

The Ethernet cable is not connected correctly to the printer’s Ethernet port.

1.

Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct

Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on connecting the cable, refer to the Quick Start Guide .

2.

Make sure the Link indicator is lit.

The Link indicator is green if the printer is connected via 100

Base-TX and orange if connected via 10Base-T.

If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.

•

Make sure the hub is on.

•

Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.

Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.

•

Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.

If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.

•

Check the communication mode with the hub.

Although the printer normally detects the hub communication mode and transmission rate automatically

(in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the hub settings cannot be detected. In this case, congure the connection method manually, specifying the communication mode in use. (→P.658)


Troubleshooting 657


Conguring the Communication Mode Manually

This topic gives instructions for conguring the communication mode manually.

1.


2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press ►.

3.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press ►.

4.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect, and then press ►.

5.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press OK.

Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.

6.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode, and then press ►.

7.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.


8.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type, and then press ►.

9.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press OK.


10.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree, and then press ►.

11.

Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press OK.


12.


After the conrmation message is displayed, press OK.

The printer will now restart.

658 Troubleshooting



Cannot print over a TCP/IP network

Cause Corrective Action

The printer’s IP address is not congured correctly.

Make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the IP

Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup

Utility”. (→P.471) or see “Conguring the IP Address

Using the Printer Control Panel”. (→P.551)

The printer’s TCP/IP network settings are not congured correctly.

The computer you are trying to print from is not congured correctly.

Make sure the printer’s TCP/IP network settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the

Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings”. (→P.549)

Make sure the computer’s TCP/IP network settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)”. (→P.567)


Troubleshooting 659


Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks


The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer.

Activate AppleTalk on the printer. For details, see “Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network

Settings”. (→P.572)


The computer and printer are not on the same network.

Make sure the computer’s AppleTalk settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”.

(→P.574) or see “Conguring the Destination for

Bonjour Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.582)

Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if the printer is on another network behind a router.

Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

660 Troubleshooting



Cannot print over a NetWare network

Cause

The printer’s NetWare settings are not congured correctly.


Make sure the printer’s NetWare settings are congured correctly. In particular, make sure a valid frame type is selected. For details, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.557)


Make sure the computer’s NetWare settings are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring

NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.566)

The NetWare server and services are not congured correctly.

Check the following points.

1.

Make sure the NetWare le server is running.

2.

Make sure there is enough free disk space on the

NetWare le server. Insufcient disk space may prevent you from processing large print jobs.

3.

Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and conrm that the print service is congured correctly and the print queue is available.

4.

If data transmission to a printer on another subnet fails, deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer’s network protocol settings.

5.

If the printer is used in queue server mode, specify

“Other/Unknown” as the printer type.


Troubleshooting 661

The printer stops during a print job

The printer stops during a print job

An error message is shown on the Display Screen

Status

An error message is displayed during printing.


Check the error message and take action as necessary.

(→P.689)

The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job, and paper could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll.

Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.

(→P.122)

(→P.118)

(→P.80)

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper

Status

The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to straighten it.


This operation is normal.

The printer cuts the leading edge of the roll to straighten it and ejects the scraps when Trim

Edge First in the printer menu is On or when Trim

Edge First is Automatic and the leading edge is slanted. The printer is ready to print after this initial preparation.

When Off is selected under Trim Edge First , the edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.

The Printhead nozzles are clogged.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.

(→P.623)

Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.

(→P.624)

A print job was received from an incompatible printer driver.

Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for the printer and try printing again.

The printer is damaged.

Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

662 Troubleshooting


Problems with the printing quality

Problems with the printing quality

Printing is faint


You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper.

Print on the printing surface.


Because the printer was left without Ink Tanks installed for some time, ink has become clogged in the ink supply system.

Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover .

During borderless printing, the ink was not dry enough before cutting.

Printing may be faint if Print Quality in Advanced

Settings in the printer driver is set to Standard or

Draft .

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.623)

After the Ink Tank has been installed for 24 hours, run Head Cleaning B .

(→P.624)

Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece of paper inside the Top Cover .

1.

Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.

2.

Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage is not over the Platen .

3.

Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover

.

4.

Close the Top Cover .

For tips on clearing paper jams, refer to the following topics.

•

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper (→P.138)

•

Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray (→P.166)

Specify a longer drying period in the printer menu, in

Roll DryingTime in Paper Details .

(→P.49)

In Advanced Settings in the printer driver, choose

Highest or High in Print Quality .

(→P.173)


Troubleshooting 663


Paper rubs against the Printhead

Cause

The paper type as specied in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer. (*1)


Load paper of the same type as you have specied in the printer driver.

(→P.119)

(→P.156)

Paper has been loaded incorrectly, causing it to wrinkle.

Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.

1.

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel printing.

2.

Change the paper type in the printer driver and try printing again.

Reload the paper.

(→P.119)

(→P.156)

The Printhead is set too low.

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

In Head Height , choose Automatic . (→P.588)

When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head

Height to Highest . (→P.595) (→P.588)

When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other

lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Standard , Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head


When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thin or thinner, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of

Weakest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head Height to Highest .

(→P.595) (→P.588)

If edges of the paper curl and become soiled when printing on rolls of glossy photo paper, in Media

Detailed Settings in the printer driver, set Near End

Margin to 20mm .

*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer.

664 Troubleshooting



The edges of the paper are dirty

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.


Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen .

(→P.640)

The paper type as specied on the printer does not match the type specied in the printer driver.

The paper is wrinkled or warped.

Make sure the same paper type is specied on the printer as in the printer driver.

(→P.124)

(→P.162)

Make sure the same paper type is specied in the printer driver as on the printer.

1.


2.

Change the paper type in the printer driver and try printing again.

Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the paper. Do not use paper that has been printed on previously.

(→P.119)

(→P.156)

A cut line is printed because the function to reduce cutting dust has been activated.

The Printhead is set too low.

You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.

If this function is not needed, deactivate

CutDustReduct. through the printer menu.

(→P.49)

In Head Height , choose Automatic . (→P.588)

When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head


When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other

lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Standard , Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head


The Ejection Guide is soiled.

If edges of the paper curl and become soiled when printing on rolls of glossy photo paper, in Media

Detailed Settings in the printer driver, set Near End

Margin to 20mm .

Clean the Ejection Guide . (→P.639)

Troubleshooting 665



The surface of the paper is dirty

Cause

The Paper Retainer is soiled.


Clean the Paper Retainer . (→P.643)

You are using a paper that does not dry easily.

Specify a time of about a minute in Roll DryingTime .

The back side of the paper is dirty

Cause

The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing or printing on small paper.


Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen .

(→P.640)

The Paper Retainer is soiled.

Clean the Paper Retainer . (→P.643)

Banding in different colors occurs


The roll is not loaded correctly in the Roll Feed Unit . Remove the roll and reload it.

(→P.119)

The paper feed amount is not adjusted correctly.

Adjust the feed amount.

(→P.589)

Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.

Printing does not proceed smoothly because print jobs are interrupted during transmission.

In the printer menu, Print Length is specied in

Feed Priority .

The Printhead is out of alignment.

Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too low.

To adjust the feed amount, specify Band Joint in

Feed Priority in the printer menu.

(→P.589)

Adjust the Printhead alignment.

(→P.584)

Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the

Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try printing again.

(→P.173)

666 Troubleshooting



The contrast becomes uneven during printing

Cause

The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.


Adjust the feed amount.

(→P.589)

Execute Fine Band Adj. during printing.

(→P.589)

Colors in printed images are uneven

Cause

Line Drawing/Text is selected when printing images in many solid colors.


Specify Image in the printer driver.

You are printing on paper that curls easily.

Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Increase the level of vacuum holding the paper against the

Platen or specify a margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more for the leading edge. (→P.595)

If you use Glossy Paper , art paper or Coated Paper

, color shading may appear at the rear edges of the paper.

In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose

Highest or High in Print Quality .

(→P.173)

Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print

Quality too low.


Advanced Settings of the printer driver.

(→P.173)

Color may be uneven between dark and light image areas.

When using Borderless Printing, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may not be even at the edges.

Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced

Settings of the printer driver.

Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the printed document ejected from the printer, then use scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.



(→P.173)

The Printhead is out of alignment.


(→P.584)

Drying documents stacked on each other may cause uneven colors.

To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each sheet separately.

Troubleshooting 667



Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper

For paper-specic troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.

(→P.108)

Lines are misaligned

Cause

The Printhead alignment is not adjusted.



(→P.584)

(→P.586)

The length of printed images is inaccurate

Cause

In the printer menu, Band Joint is specied in Feed

Priority .


To ensure the feed amount matches the paper size, select Print Length in Feed Priority in the printer menu and enter the amount for adjustment in Adjust

Length . You can adjust the feed amount in 0.02% increments. (→P.49)

Documents are printed in monochrome

Cause

In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,

Monochrome or Monochrome (Photo) , is specied in Color Mode .


In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.


Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.623)

668 Troubleshooting



Printed colors are inaccurate

Cause

Color adjustment has not been activated in the



In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver, access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust colors.

Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or monitor.


In the printer driver, Application Color Matching

Priority is not selected.

Refer to the computer and monitor documentation to adjust the colors.

Adjust the settings of the color management software, referring to the software documentation as needed.

Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged.

(→P.623)

Click Special Settings on the Layout sheet of the printer driver and select Application Color Matching

Priority in the dialog box.

Execute color calibration.

There may be a slight difference in how colors are printed after you replace the Printhead because of individual variation among Printheads .

Printhead characteristics gradually change through repeated use, and colors may change.


Color may change slightly even on the same model of printer if you use a different version of the rmware or printer driver, or when you print under different settings or in a different printing environment.

Follow these steps to prepare the printing environment.

1.

Use the same version of rmware or printer driver.

2.

Specify the same value for all settings items.

3.


The region selection of the Media Conguration Tool was changed when you reinstalled the printer driver.

If you change the region selection of the Media

Conguration Tool , region-specic paper information originally registered on the printer before installation will be deleted. If the information of paper you used for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper.

Perform color calibration again using paper supported in the newly selected region and compatible with color calibration.

Troubleshooting 669



Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs

Cause

The Platen suction is too strong.


Set VacuumStrngth to Weakest . (→P.595)

The Printhead is set too high.

Lower the Printhead . (→P.588)

Documents are printed crooked

Cause

Skew Skew Check Lv. has been set to Loose or

Off .


Choose Standard in Skew Check Lv. .

Width Detection has been set to Off .

Choose On in Width Detection .

White dots about 1 mm (0.039 in) apart appear on printed documents, in the direction paper is fed.

Cause

The media type setting is incorrect.


After you select the correct media type, clean the parts used in paper feeding (spurs).

(→P.162)

(→P.124)

(→P.644)

Parts used in paper feeding (spurs) are soiled.

Clean the Spurs.

(→P.644)

Immediately After Borderless Printing, the Trailing Edge

Margin is Soiled During Regular Printing

Cause

Depending on your printing environment, after borderless printing in which the leading and trailing edge of the roll is cut automatically, any ink adhering to the cutter unit may rub off on the next printed document.


Follow these steps to set the Between Pages setting of Drying Time in a range of 30 seconds to 3 minutes before borderless printing.

1.

On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click

Settings in Media Type .

2.

Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time .

670 Troubleshooting



Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of paper

Cause

A document was removed after printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot without pressing the

Load/Eject button.


Following the instructions, press the Load/Eject button, remove the paper, and then press the OK button.

Wipe away any soiling on the rollers. (→P.640)

(→P.643)

Line thickness is not uniform (Windows)

Cause

In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows printer driver, Fast Graphic Process is selected.


Open the printer driver’s Properties dialog box from

Print in the application software’s File menu, and try printing following the steps below.

1.

Remove the check from Open Preview When

Print Job Starts in the Main sheet.

2.

Remove the check from Page Layout in the

Layout sheet.

3.

Click the Special Settings button in the Layout sheet to open the Special Settings dialog box, and remove the check from Fast Graphic

Process .


Troubleshooting 671

Installation problems

Installation problems

The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed Correctly

In Windows, the device interface driver may not be installed correctly in some cases if you connected the

IEEE 1394 cable before installing the printer driver.

If so, reinstall the IEEE 1394 device interface driver and the printer driver as follows.

Important

•

This procedure is based on an example for Windows XP. The name of the wizard may be different in other operating systems.

1.

Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to display the System Properties window.

2.

On the Hardware sheet, click Device Manager to display the Device Manager window.

3.

Right-click Other Devices icon and choose Properties.

4.

On the Driver sheet, click Update Driver to start the Hardware Update Wizard (or the Upgrade

Device Driver Wizard.)

5.

Follow the instructions on the screen.

6.

When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the CD-ROM drive. Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer and follow the instructions on the screen.

The device/interface driver is installed.

The device is detected, and the New Hardware Wizard (or Add New Hardware Wizard ) is started.

7.


8.

When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the printer driver folder.

Choose the CD-ROM drive > Driver > WinXP_2K > Driver, and click OK. (For Windows

2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003)

9.


The printer driver is installed.

672 Troubleshooting


Installation problems

Removing Installed Printer Drivers

Follow the steps below to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.

Removing printer drivers (Windows)

Remove the printer driver as follows.

Note

•

In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with administrative rights such as “Administrator” account.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller >

imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.

2.

Select the printer in the list and click Delete.

3.

Click Yes in the Warning message dialog box.

4.

Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and click Exit.

Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

(Macintosh)

Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.

1.

Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.

2.

Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM.

For Mac OS X, open OS X and double-click iPF Driver Installer X.

For Mac OS 9, open OS 9 and double-click iPF Driver Installer 9.

3.

In the upper-left menu, choose Uninstall, and click Uninstall.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Status Monitor >

Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.

2.

In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.

3.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.

1.

From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility >

Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.

2.

In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.

3.

Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Troubleshooting 673


Clearing jammed paper

Clearing jammed paper

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel.

Remove the jammed paper as follows.

Note

•

For instructions on removing a paper jam from a roll if the scrap of paper remains in the Paper Feed

Slot, see “Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)”. (→P.142)

1.

Open the Roll Paper Unit Cover. Use a store-bought cutter or the like to cut the paper of the loaded roll.

Caution

•

When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.

2.

Press Load/Eject button.

674 Troubleshooting


3.


•


1.

Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side.


2.



3.


Important

•



Troubleshooting 675


•

If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot

1.


2.



•




4.

Press OK.

676 Troubleshooting




1.

Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer. (→P.147)

2.



3.

Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again. (→P.148)


Troubleshooting 677


Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)

Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper.

1.

Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Cut Sheet lamp.

2.


A screen is displayed for paper type selection.

3.

Select POP Board and press the OK button.

A screen is displayed for paper size selection.

4.

Select the desired size and press the OK button.

Instructions for feeding POP Board are shown on the Control Panel, but instead of following them, follow this procedure to remove the jammed paper.

5.

Open the Top Cover.

6.

Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Back Cover. Push the scrap out toward the Platen.

7.

Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.

8.

If any scraps remain inside the Paper Feed Slot, repeat steps 6 and 7.

9.


10.


678 Troubleshooting



Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray

If a sheet loaded manually becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control

Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.

1.

Press Load/Eject.

2.


•


1.

Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the side manually.

2.



3.


Troubleshooting 679



Important

•


•

If paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot of the Top Paper Feed Slot



•




680 Troubleshooting



•

If paper is jammed in the back of the printer

Remove the jammed paper from the back.


3.

Press OK button.


1.

Turn off the printer and remove the Roll Feed Unit from the printer.

(→P.147)

2.



3.

Install the Roll Feed Unit on the printer again.

(→P.148)


Troubleshooting 681

If the Printer makes a strange sound

If the Printer makes a strange sound

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound

The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.

•

There is a sound of vacuum from the Platen

To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it.

•

Roll paper makes a uttering sound during printing

There may be a uttering sound when large paper is advanced.

•

If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations

At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will begin automatically, even if the printer is in Sleep mode.

In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.

682 Troubleshooting


Other problems

Other problems

The printer consumes a lot of ink

Cause

Many full-page color images are printed.


In print jobs such as photos, images are lled with color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer.

Head Cleaning B is used often.

You have just nished initial installation, when more ink is consumed to ll the system.

Head Cleaning B consumes a lot of ink. This does not indicate a problem with the printer. Unless the printer has been moved or stored for a long period or you are troubleshooting Printhead problems, we recommend not performing Head Cleaning B , to the extent possible.

After initial installation or at the rst-time use after transfer, ink ows into the system between the Ink

Tank and Printhead , which may cause the ink level indicators to drop to 80%. This does not indicate a problem with the printer.

A message to check the Maintenance Cartridge is not cleared after you replace the Maintenance Cartridge

Cause

The printer has not detected the new Maintenance

Cartridge .


Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have just installed and insert it again rmly.

Restart the printer.

Paper is not cut straight

Cause

The paper is bent or curled at the cut position.

Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before it is cut.


Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.

Reload the paper correctly.

Paper cannot be cut

Cause

The printed document became caught on a foreign object by the Output Tray , which lifted the document.

The Cutter passed under the paper.


Remove the foreign object by the Output Tray to enable the printer to eject the printed document, keeping it level.

Specify Yes in Auto Cut in the printer driver.

In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is specied in Auto Cut .

In MAIN MENU , Eject or Manual is specied in

Cutting Mode .

Specify Automatic in Cutting Mode in MAIN MENU .

Troubleshooting 683


Other problems

Depression on the leading edge is left

Cause

Keeping a roll in the printer for a long time without printing on it may leave a depression on the leading edge.


When printing quality is most important, we recommend setting TrimEdge Reload to On or

Automatic so that the paper edge is automatically cut before printing.

Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of paper

Cause

A document was removed after printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot without pressing the

Load/Eject button.


Following the instructions, press the Load/Eject button, remove the paper, and then press the OK button.

Wipe away any soiling on the rollers. (→P.640)

(→P.643)

The printer does not go on

Cause

The printer is unplugged.

The specied voltage is not supplied.


Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.

For information on the specied voltage, see

“Specications”. (→P.72)

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot

Cause

The roll paper is warped.


Straighten out curls and reload the roll.

The roll was pulled out by force when it had been advanced before printing, and this action closed the

Paper Feed Slot .

Hold down the Load/Eject button for a while and reload the roll.

Cannot Load Sheets

Cause

The paper source selection is incorrect.


Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the

Cut Sheet lamp .

684 Troubleshooting


Other problems

Ink level detection

Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.

Ink level detection

Ink Tanks (→P.613) specied for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out during printing, which prevents printer damage.

This function will not work correctly if you use rell ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using rell ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.

Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc.

is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of relling ink.

Caution

•

After ink level detection has been disabled, this function cannot be reactivated for the currently loaded

Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with a new ink tank specied for use with the printer.

•

Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.

Disabling Ink Level Detection

1.

On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected.

2.

Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the OK button.

A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen about disabling ink level detection.

3.

Press ► and check the message on the Display Screen.

Troubleshooting 685


Other problems

4.


A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen.

5.


A conrmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen.

6.


Ink level detection is now disabled, and the printer goes online.

686 Troubleshooting


Responding to Messages

Error Message

Responding to Messages

Responding to Error Messages

Warning messages

Warning messages are shown on lines 2-4 of the Display Screen.

Although warning messages do not prevent printer operation, you should check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.689)

Error messages (if action can be taken)

Error messages are indicated on the Display Screen if you must respond before the printer can resume operation.

Check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.689)

Error messages (if no action can be taken)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.

If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your

Canon dealer for assistance.

•

The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on

again.

•

“ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.

Error Message 687



Other Messages

These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:

Note

•

Messages are also displayed in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) or imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor (Macintosh).

688 Error Message



Error Messages

Warning messages

Warning messages are shown on lines 2-4 of the Display Screen.

Although warning messages do not prevent printer operation, you should check the message and take the appropriate action.

•

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) (→P.709)

•

Ink Level: Check (→P.701)

•

End of paper feed. (→P.698)

•

Prepare for parts replacement. (→P.709)

•

Parts replacement time has passed. (→P.709)

•

Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR) (→P.707)

•

Prepare for maint cart replacement. (→P.708)

•

Paper Mismatch (→P.691)

•

Papr Size Mismatch (→P.692)

•

Papr Type Mismatch (→P.691)

Error messages (if action can be taken)

Check the message and take the appropriate action.

•

Ink tank is empty. (→P.703)

•

Ink insufcient. (→P.702)

•

No ink tank loaded. (→P.701)

•

Ink tank error. (→P.703)

•

Top cover is open. (→P.709)

•

Sheet printing is selected. (→P.694)

•

Cannot calibrate. (→P.705)

•

Cannot feed paper. (→P.695)

•

Insufcient paper for job (→P.693)

•

Use another paper. (→P.704)

•

This paper cannot be used. (→P.692)

•

Cannot print as specied. (→P.704)

•

Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. (→P.695)

•

Wrong paper feed slot for this paper type. (→P.695)

•

Cannot adjust band. (→P.704)

•

Unknown le. (→P.709)

•

Borderless printng not possible. (→P.696)

•

x printhead error (x is Left or Right) (→P.707)

•

x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right) (→P.706)

•

PHeads: wrong pos. (→P.706)

•

Cannot adjust printhead. (→P.705)

•

Multi-sensor error (→P.710)

•

Maintenance cartridge problem. (→P.708)

•

Maintenance cartridge full. (→P.708)

•

No maintenance cartridge. (→P.708)

•

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (→P.708)

•

Paper Mismatch (→P.691)

•

Paper jam. (→P.699)

•

Paper loaded askew. (→P.697)

Error Message 689



•

Papr Size Mismatch (→P.692)

•

Paper size not detected. (→P.697)

•

Papr Type Mismatch (→P.691)

•

Cannot feed paper. (→P.698)

•

Cannot cut paper. (→P.699)

•

Cannot detect papr (→P.698)

•

Roll printing is selected. (→P.694)

•

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. (→P.694)

•

The roll is empty. (→P.700)

•

Roll feed unit err (→P.700)

•

No Roll Feed Unit. (→P.700)

Error messages (if no action can be taken)

•

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.710)

•

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.709)

Other Messages

These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:

•

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. (→P.703)

•

Excessive temperature or humidity. (→P.705)

•

Cannot execute this command. Use other paper. (→P.704)

690 Error Message


Messages regarding paper

Messages regarding paper

Paper Mismatch

Cause

You printed a test pattern for printer adjustment on several sheets, but sheets of different types or sizes of paper were used.


When printing a test pattern, use sheets of the same type and size of paper.

Papr Type Mismatch

Cause

The paper type as specied on the printer does not match the type specied in the printer driver.


Make sure the same type of paper is specied on the printer as in the printer driver.

(→P.80)

(→P.85)

Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches on the printer and in the printer driver.

1.


2.

Either change the type of paper specied in the printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper and change the paper type setting on the printer.


However, this may cause a paper jam or printing problem.

*Printing will continue if you have set Detect Mismatch to Warning or None.


Error Message 691


Papr Size Mismatch

The paper size as specied on the printer does not match the size specied in the printer driver.

Cause

If you have selected Fit Roll Paper

Width in the printer driver settings and Warning in Detect Mismatch in the printer menu:


Printing resumes after the warning message is displayed. However, note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the printing quality. Try printing again after adjusting the paper size as specied in the printer driver and the size specied on the printer so that they match.

If you have selected Fit Roll Paper

Width in the printer driver settings and Pause in Detect Mismatch in the printer menu:

Follow the steps below to ensure the paper size matches on the printer and in the printer driver.

1.


2.

Load paper of the same size as you have specied in the printer driver.

3.

Change the paper size in the printer driver and try printing again.


However, this may cause a paper jam or printing problem.

This paper cannot be used.

Check supported paper sizes.

Cause

The loaded paper is too large for the printer.

The loaded paper is too small for the printer.

Paper has been loaded that is too small to print the test pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle checking.


Load paper of the correct size.

(→P.113)

Load paper of the correct size.

(→P.113)

Load unused paper A4/Letter-sized or larger. More than one sheet may be required depending on the adjustment.

692 Error Message



Insufcient paper for job

Cause

The printer has received a print job longer than the amount of roll paper left.


Follow the steps below to replace the roll.

1.

Remove the roll.

(→P.122)

(→P.118)

2.

Load a roll with enough paper left.

(→P.116)

(→P.119)

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper type.

(→P.124)

4.

Select the paper length, unless a barcode was printed on the roll and you have deactivated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper.

(→P.125)



However, the roll paper may run out during the print job and you may not be able to print all of the document.


Error Message 693


Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.

Cause

A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is loaded.


Press the OK button and remove the sheet.

(→P.164)

Load a roll and try printing again.

(→P.80)


Roll printing is selected.

Cause

You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status information on a roll, but no roll is loaded.


Load a roll and try printing again.

To print on a sheet instead, hold the Stop button for more than a second to cancel printing, load a sheet, and then print. (→P.85)

Sheet printing is selected.

Cause

You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status information on a sheet, but no sheet is loaded.


Load a sheet and try printing again.

To print on a roll instead, hold the Stop button for more than a second to cancel printing, load a roll, and then print. (→P.80)

694 Error Message



Wrong paper feed slot for this paper type.

Cause

The Paper Feed Slot where paper is loaded does not match the Paper Feed Slot specied as the paper source.


Try printing again after changing the settings in the printer driver so that the Paper Feed Slot where paper is loaded matches the Paper Feed Slot specied as the paper source. (→P.85)

Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.

Cause

A print job for manually printing on sheets was sent when a roll is loaded.



Load paper of the type and size you have specied in the printer driver. (→P.85)

Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel printing. Change the printer driver settings to match the roll already loaded, and then try printing again.

Cannot feed paper.

Cause

The paper has come out of the printer.

A paper jam has occurred.


Remove the paper, press the Load/Eject button, and reload the paper.

Press the Load/Eject button, remove the jammed paper, and reload paper.

If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power.


Error Message 695


Borderless printng not possible.

Check roll width and spacers.

Cause

The paper is loaded askew.


Insert the paper and Spacer for Borderless Printing

rmly all the way into the printer.

When using A1 or A2 rolls, attach the Spacer for

Borderless Printing before loading the roll.

(→P.144)

The paper loaded is not compatible with borderless printing.

When using sizes other than A1 or A2, remove the

Spacer for Borderless Printing before loading the roll.

(→P.144)

Load paper compatible with borderless printing and try printing again. Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the


Because paper expands or contracts depending on the environment of use, it may become narrower or wider than the supported width for borderless printing.

Use each type of paper only where the recommended environmental conditions are met. For details on environmental conditions for various paper, see the


Check supported paper.

Cause

The print job received species a type or width of paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.


Follow these steps to change the settings of the print job to enable borderless printing.

1.


2.

Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer is selected and try printing again.

For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference

Guide . (→P.108)

If you press the Online button and continue printing, the document will be printed with a border.

696 Error Message



Paper loaded askew.

Cause

Paper has been loaded askew.


Follow these steps to reload a roll.

1.

Remove the crooked paper.

2.

Press the Load/Eject button and reload the roll.

(→P.119)

Follow these step to reload a sheet.

1.

Remove the crooked paper.

2.

Press the Load/Eject button and reload the sheet.

(→P.156)

Note

•

To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off or Loose in the Skew Check Lv. setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams if paper is crooked when printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of the next document when it is printed.

Paper size not detected.

Cause

Paper has been loaded askew, or warped paper has been loaded.


Reload paper straight, in the correct position.

(→P.119)

(→P.156)


Error Message 697


Cannot detect papr

Cause

The paper has come out of the printer.

A paper jam occurred in the printer.

The roll cannot be correctly detected.


Remove the paper that has come out of the printer, press the Load/Eject button, and reload the paper.

(→P.80)

(→P.85)

Remove the jammed paper, press the Load/Eject button, and reload paper.

(→P.138)

(→P.166)

Rewind the roll manually until the paper caught in the rollers is completely out of the rollers. Press the

Load/Eject button and reload the roll.

End of paper feed.

Cause

You are pressing the ▲ button on the Control Panel and trying to rewind the roll to the edge.


Release the ▲ button.

Cannot feed paper.

Cause

The sheet cannot be fed correctly.


Reload the sheet straight, in the correct position.

(→P.156)

698 Error Message



Paper jam.


A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.

Press the Load/Eject button and remove the jammed paper.

(→P.138)

(→P.166)

You have loaded and printed on a roll when sheets are selected as the paper source on the Control

Panel .

Press the Load/Eject button, remove the roll, and load a sheet. Otherwise, select the roll as the media source on the Control Panel and reload the roll.

Cannot cut paper.

Cause

There are sheets left on the Ejection Guide .


Remove the paper.

Remove the foreign object.

There is a foreign object by the Output Tray , obstructing the Cutter Unit .

You are not using the printer under the recommended environmental conditions for the paper.

Use the printer only where the recommended environmental conditions for the paper are met.

Note that various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. For details on the recommended environmental conditions for paper, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.108)

You are using paper that is not compatible with automatic cutting.

The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.

In other cases, the Cutter Unit may be damaged.

Cut the roll manually.

(→P.129)

Move the Cutter Unit to the left, and then remove the roll paper. If the roll cannot be cut using the Cutter

Unit , cut the roll manually.

(→P.129)



Error Message 699


The roll is empty.

Cause

There is no more paper left on the roll.


Follow the steps below to replace the used roll with a new roll of the same type and size.

1.

Remove the roll.

(→P.122)

(→P.118)

2.

Load the new roll.

(→P.119)

3.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper type.

(→P.124)

4.

If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the paper length.

(→P.125)

Roll feed unit err

Cause

The Roll Feed Unit is not working.


Turn off the printer, remove the Roll Feed Unit momentarily, and then reinstall it.

(→P.147)

(→P.148)

If the message is still displayed after you do this, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

No Roll Feed Unit.

Cause

The printer has received a print job that species rolls, but the Roll Feed Unit is not installed.


Install the Roll Feed Unit and resend the print job.

(→P.148)

700 Error Message


Messages regarding ink

Messages regarding ink

Ink Level: Check

Cause

Not much ink is left.


Prepare a new Ink Tank .

We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink

Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or high-quantity jobs.

No ink tank loaded.

Cause

There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the printer.


Load or reload the Ink Tank .

(→P.614)

There is a problem with the Ink Tank .

Replace it with a new Ink Tank .

(→P.614)


Error Message 701


Ink insufcient.

Cause

The ink level is low, so you cannot clean the

Printhead .


Press the OK button and replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank .

(→P.614)

The ink level is low, so there may not be enough ink to nish printing.

Press the OK button and replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank .

(→P.614)

You can print until the ink runs out by pressing the

Online button. However, if the ink runs out during printing, the following situation will occur depending on the position of the leading edge when it passes through the printer.

1.

Ink tank is empty. is displayed and printing stops. Press the Stop button to cancel printing, or press the OK button, replace the ink tank that is low with a new one, and continue printing.

However, note that because printing is paused, colors may be slightly different. (→P.614)

2.

Ink tank empty. Canceling printing of this

page. is displayed and printing stops. After the paper is ejected, press the OK button and replace the ink tank that is low with a new one. (→P.614)

702 Error Message


Ink tank is empty.

Cause

There is no ink left.



Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.

(→P.614)

Ink tank error.

Cause

The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible.


Load an Ink Tank specied for use with the printer.

(→P.614)

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.

Cause

Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use rell ink tanks.


The rell ink tank can no longer be used. See the section “Ink level detection” and take the appropriate action. (→P.685)


Error Message 703

Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Use another paper.

Cause

The Printhead and feed amount cannot be adjusted when highly transparent lm is loaded.


For automatic Printhead adjustment, we recommend using a type of paper that you often use, other than

lm.

(→P.584)

Adjust the feed amount manually.

(→P.592)

Cannot execute this command. Use other paper.


The loaded paper cannot be used for color calibration. Load paper compatible with color calibration.*1 See

"Paper Reference Guide ." (→P.108)

*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.

Cannot print as specied.

Press Load/Eject and replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger


The loaded paper is too small.

Press the Load/Eject button and switch to paper A4/Letter, vertical, or larger.

Press Load/Eject and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll.


The loaded paper is too small.

Press the Load/Eject button and load a roll at least 10 inches (254 mm) wide.

Cannot adjust band.

Cause



Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.

1.


(→P.623)

2.


(→P.624)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for feed amount adjustment.


(→P.592)

704 Error Message


Messages regarding printing or adjusment

Cannot adjust printhead.

Cause




1.


(→P.623)

2.


(→P.624)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for Printhead adjustment.

We recommend using a type of paper that you often use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.

(→P.584)

Excessive temperature or humidity.

Cause

The temperature or humidity where the printer is installed is out of the acceptable range for printer operation.


Press the Stop button and stop printing.

Use the printer in an environment that meets the requirements for the operating environment. Note that various environmental conditions are also recommended for various types of paper. For details on the recommended environmental conditions for paper, see "Paper Reference Guide ." (→P.108)

Press the OK button and complete color calibration.

However, calibration may not be completed successfully.

Cannot calibrate.

Cause

The paper for printing a test pattern for adjustment is soiled. Otherwise, colored paper is loaded.


Load unused paper compatible with color calibration.

(→P.108)

The printed test pattern is faint.

Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.

Take steps to remedy the faint printing.

(→P.663)

Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.

Error Message 705


Messages regarding printheads

Messages regarding printheads

Cannot adjust printhead.

Cause




1.


(→P.623)

2.


(→P.624)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for Printhead adjustment.

We recommend using a type of paper that you often use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.

(→P.584)

Cannot adjust band.

Cause




1.


(→P.623)

2.


(→P.624)

Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used for feed amount adjustment.


(→P.592)

x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right)

Cause




If the message is still displayed after you execute

Head Cleaning B two or three times, contact your


PHeads: wrong pos.

Cause

The left Printhead is installed in the right position and vice versa.


Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring the power. If the message is displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

706 Error Message


Messages regarding printheads

Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR)

Cause

The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged.


If printing is faint, clean the Printhead . (→P.624)

x printhead error (x is Left or Right)

Cause

An incompatible Printhead has been installed.


Install a Printhead specied for use with the printer. If

“Printhead L” is displayed, install the Printhead L ; if

“Printhead R” is displayed, install the Printhead R .

(→P.625)

There is a problem with the Printhead .

Open the Top Cover . If the Carriage is over the

Platen , replace the Printhead with a new one. If

“Printhead L” is displayed, replace the Printhead L ; if

“Printhead R” is displayed, replace the Printhead R .

(→P.625)

If, after opening the Top Cover , you see that the

Carriage is not over the Platen , follow the steps below.

1.

Close the Top Cover and press the Online button.

2.

If “Printhead L” is displayed, install the Printhead L

; if “Printhead R” is displayed, install the Printhead

R .

(→P.625)


Error Message 707

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

No maintenance cartridge.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed.


Install the Maintenance Cartridge .

(→P.632)

Prepare for maint cart replacement.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full.


You can continue to print, but prepare a new

Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for replacement is displayed.

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.


After conrming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .

(→P.632)

Maintenance cartridge full.

Cause

The Maintenance Cartridge is full.


After conrming that the printer has stopped operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .

(→P.632)

Maintenance cartridge problem.

Cause

An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has been installed.


Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specied for use with the printer.

(→P.632)

708 Error Message


Other Messages

Other Messages

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)

Cause

There is a problem with the print job.


Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.

It is also possible to continue printing in this state.

However, you may not be able to obtain the desired printing results.

Top cover is open.

Cause

The printer has detected that the Top Cover is open.


Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects, and close the Top Cover again.

If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait a while before restoring power.

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.



•

“ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.

Unknown le.

Cause

Invalid data format.


Check the print job and resend it.

Prepare for parts replacement.

Cause

It is almost time to replace consumables for which service is required.


If Parts replacement time has passed. is displayed, you can continue to use the printer for some time.


Parts replacement time has passed.

Cause

It is past the recommended time to replace consumables for which service is required.



Error Message 709


Other Messages

Multi-sensor error

Cause

Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.

The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be impaired.


Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.


Roll feed unit err

Cause

The Roll Feed Unit is not working.


Turn off the printer, remove the Roll Feed Unit momentarily, and then reinstall it.

(→P.147)

(→P.148)

If the message is still displayed after you do this, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

No Roll Feed Unit.

Cause

The printer has received a print job that species rolls, but the Roll Feed Unit is not installed.


Install the Roll Feed Unit and resend the print job.

(→P.148)

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power. However, keep the printer off and remove the roll if the last portion of roll paper was used during a print job and paper could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll. If tape and the Belt Stopper have not been removed from inside the Top Cover, turn off the printer, open the Top Cover, and remove the tape and Belt Stopper before restoring power.



•

The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on

again.

710 Error Message


Index

A

A message to check the Maintenance Cartridge is not cleared after you replace the Maintenance

Cartridge .................................................................683

About This User Manual .............................................1

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from

Applications (Mac OS 9) .........................................535


Applications (Mac OS X) ........................................ 511


Applications (Windows) .................................. 473, 611

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the

Operating System Menu (Windows) ...............149, 475

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) .....................528

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) ....................505

Adjusting Color on the Trailing Edge of Sheets ......598

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver .................184

Color Adjustment ..............................................184

Color Mode .......................................................184

Gray Tone Adjustment ......................................187

Matching ...........................................................185

Adjusting the feed amount ......................................589

Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically ..............589

Adjusting the feed amount during printing ........591

Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually .....................592

Adjusting the feed amount during printing ........594

Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better

Accuracy .................................................................596

Adjusting the Printhead ..........................................584

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically ...584

Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually ..........586

Adjusting the Printhead Height ...............................588

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength ..............................595

An error message is shown on the Display

Screen ....................................................................662

Attaching Accessories to the Roll Holder ...............144

Attaching the Spacer for Borderless Printing ...145

Mounting the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment ...144

Removing the 3-Inch Paper Core Attachment ..144

Removing the Spacer for Borderless Printing ..145

B

Back ...........................................................................9

Banding in different colors occurs ..........................666

Basic Environmental Performance ...........................77

Packaging materials ...........................................77

Printer .................................................................77

Basic Printing Workflow ............................................80

Borderless Printing .................................................297

Borderless Printing at Actual Size ..................279, 301

Borderless Printing ...................................279, 301

Borderless Printing Method ......................279, 301

Print Image with Actual Size .....................280, 302

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

(Mac OS 9) .....................................................286, 308


(Mac OS X) .....................................................283, 305


(Windows) ......................................................281, 303


Roll Width ...............................................................299

Borderless Printing ...........................................299

Borderless Printing Method ..............................299

Scale to fit Roll Paper Width .............................300


Roll Width (Mac OS 9) ............................................317


Roll Width (Mac OS X) ...........................................314


Roll Width (Windows) .............................................312

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9) ....................................326

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) ....................................323

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) ......................................321

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size ....297

Borderless Printing ...........................................297

Borderless Printing Method ..............................297

Fit Media Size ...................................................298

Borderless printng not possible. .............................696

Check roll width and spacers. ..........................696

Check supported paper. ...................................696

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing

(Windows) ..............................................................604

Index

Index 711


Index

C

Canceling print jobs ..................................................99

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS 9 .....................105

Canceling background print jobs ......................105

Canceling foreground print jobs .......................106

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X .....................103

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel ...........99

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows .......................101

Cannot adjust band. .......................................704, 706

Cannot adjust printhead. ................................705, 706

Cannot calibrate. ....................................................705

Cannot connect the printer to the network .............657

Cannot cut paper. ...................................................699

Cannot detect papr .................................................698

Cannot execute this command. Use other paper. ..704

Cannot feed paper. .........................................695, 698

Cannot Load Sheets ...............................................684

Cannot print as specified. .......................................704

Cannot print over a NetWare network ....................661

Cannot print over a network ...................................657

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network .......................659

Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks ..660

Carriage ....................................................................13

Centering originals .................................................378

Checking for Nozzle Clogging ................................623

Checking Ink Tank Levels .......................................620

Checking the Layout Before Printing ......................495

Preview (Macintosh) .........................................495

Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X) ..496

Checking the Print Quality ......................................622

Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge

Capacity .................................................................637

Choosing a Paper for Printing ................................172

If the paper type is not listed for selection ........172

Media type ........................................................172

Choosing the Document Type and Printing

Conditions (Mac OS 9) ...........................................195


Conditions (Mac OS X) ...........................................192


Conditions (Windows) ............................................190

Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ...............................640

Cleaning Spurs Used in Paper Feeding .................644

Cleaning the Paper Retainer ..................................643

Cleaning the Printer ................................................639

Cleaning the Printer Exterior ..................................639

Cleaning the Printhead ...................................624, 647

Cleaning the Printhead .............................624, 647

Clearing jammed paper ..........................................674

Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot) ...142, 678

Clearing Jammed Paper from the Tray ..........166, 679

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper .........................138, 674

Color adjustment ....................................................600

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9) .................537

Color Adjustment pane: color ...........................537

Matching pane ..................................................539

Object Adjustment dialog box ...........................538

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) .................512

Color Adjustment pane: color ...........................512

Matching pane ..................................................513

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9) .....540

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome ..............540


Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) .....514

Color Adjustment pane: monochrome ..............514

Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows) ..................477

Color Adjustment : color ...................................477

Light Source Check Tool ..................................482

Matching sheet: Ambient Light Matching Mode

(Kyuanos) .........................................................481

Matching sheet: Driver Matching Mode ............479

Matching sheet: ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM

Mode, and Host ICM Mode ..............................480


Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) .....483

Color Adjustment : monochrome ......................483


Colors in printed images are uneven ......................667

Configuring NetWare Network Settings ..................566

Configuring the Communication Mode Manually ....658

Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................574

Activating AppleTalk on the printer ...................574

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS 9) ...........575

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X) ..........576

Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................582

Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network

(Macintosh) .............................................................578

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS 9) ...........578

Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X) ..........580

Configuring the IP Address on the Printer ..............547

Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING

Commands .............................................................552

712 Index


Index

Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility ........................................471, 571

Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer

Control Panel ..........................................................551

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination

(Macintosh) .............................................................573

Configuring the Printer Driver Destination

(Windows) ..............................................................567

Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network

Settings ..................................................................572

Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network

Settings ..................................................................557

Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network

Settings ..................................................................549

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS 9) ....................518

Checking a preview of the settings ...................518

Checking a print preview ..................................519

Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X) ....................493



Confirming Print Settings (Windows) ......................443



Confirming the Print Image Before Printing ............485

Conserving roll paper .............................................395

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without

Top and Bottom Margins ........................................396

No Spaces at Top or Bottom

(Conserve Paper) .............................................396


Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9) .....................402


Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) .....................399


Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) ......................397


Degrees ..................................................................395

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) .....395


Degrees (Mac OS 9) ..............................................409


Degrees (Mac OS X) ..............................................406


Degrees (Windows) ................................................404

Control Panel ......................................................15, 19

Correcting Print Misalignment ................................584

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing .............................421

Automatic Cutting .............................................421

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9) .........427

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) .........425

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) ...........424

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper

Automatically ..........................................................128

D

Depression on the leading edge is left ...................684

Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper ..................127

Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) ..........................527

Device Settings Sheet (Windows) ..........................462

Digital Photo Front-Access .....................................472

Documents are printed crooked .............................670

Documents are printed in monochrome .................668

E

Email Notification When Printing is Finished or

Errors Occur ...........................................................556

End of paper feed. ..................................................698

Enhanced Printing Options .....................................172

ERROR Exxx-xxxx

(x represents a letter or number) ............................709

Error Message ........................................................687

Error Messages ......................................................689

F

Error messages (if action can be taken) ...........689

Error messages (if no action can be taken) ......690

Other Messages ...............................................690

Warning messages ...........................................689

Excessive temperature or humidity. ........................705

Favorites Sheet (Windows) ....................................459

Feeding Paper from the Roll Feed Unit ..................146

Feeding Roll Paper Manually .................................126

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................204


(Mac OS X) .............................................................201


(Windows) ..............................................................198

Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing

Photos (Mac OS 9) .................................................212


Photos (Mac OS X) ................................................209


Photos (Windows) ..................................................207

Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9) ....................................525

Frequently Asked Questions ..................................653

Front ...........................................................................8

Index 713


Index

G

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) ..................709

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and

Colors for Printing ...................................................173

Advanced Settings ...........................................173

Color Settings ...................................................175

Enhancing Printing Quality ...............................176

Print Priority ......................................................173

Print Quality ......................................................174

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9) ........................526

Gray Adjustment ...............................................526

Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) ........................504

Gray Adjustment ...............................................504

Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows) ........................458

Gray Adjustment ...............................................458

H

I

Handling Paper .......................................................107

Handling rolls .......................................................... 115

Handling sheets for paper feed slots ......................154

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx

(x represents a letter or number) ............................710

How to use this manual ..............................................1

HTML Version of the Manual for Printing ....................4

IEEE 1394 Expansion Board ....................................71

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound ....................682

Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding

Occurs ....................................................................670

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility ....................469

imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh) ....510, 534 imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) ..........468

Immediately After Borderless Printing, the Trailing

Edge Margin is Soiled During Regular Printing ......670

Improving the Print Quality .....................................622

Initializing the Network Settings .............................548

Ink insufficient. ........................................................702

Ink level detection ...................................................685

Disabling Ink Level Detection ...........................685

Ink level detection .............................................685

Ink Level: Check .....................................................701

Ink Tank ..................................................................613

Ink Tank Cover (Inside) .............................................14

Ink tank error. .........................................................703

Ink tank is empty. ....................................................703

Ink Tanks ................................................................613

L

Installation problems ..............................................672

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup

Utility ...............................................................470, 570

Installing the Roll Feed Unit ...................................148

Insufficient paper for job .........................................693

Introduction .................................................................1

Layout Sheet (Windows) ........................................456

Line thickness is not uniform (Windows) ................671

Lines are misaligned ..............................................668

Loading and Printing on Rolls ..................................80

Loading and Printing on Sheets in the Paper Feed

Slot ...........................................................................85

Loading Rolls in the Roll Feed Unit ........................ 119

Loading Rolls on the Roll Paper Holder ................. 116

Loading Sheets Manually .......................................156

Loading heavyweight paper in the Front Paper

Feed Slot ..........................................................158

Loading paper in the Top Paper Feed Slot .......156

M

Mac OS 9 ...............................................................517

Mac OS X ...............................................................492

Main Menu Operations .............................................30

Accessing Menus ...............................................31

Executing menu commands ...............................34

Specifying menu items .......................................32

Specifying numerical values ...............................33

Main Menu Settings ..................................................49

Adjust Printer ......................................................53

Information .........................................................58

Interface Setup ...................................................54

Maintenance .......................................................55

Media Menu ........................................................50

Paper Details ......................................................51

System Setup .....................................................56

Main Menu Settings (During Printing) ......................59

Information .........................................................60

Main Pane (Mac OS 9) ...........................................521

Configuration using Advanced Settings ............522

Configuration using Easy Settings ...................521

Main Pane (Mac OS X) ..........................................499



Main Sheet (Windows) ...........................................450



714 Index


Index

Maintenance ...........................................................584

Maintenance Cartridge ...........................................632

Maintenance cartridge full. .....................................708

Maintenance cartridge problem. .............................708

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation ..............................................................420

Mirror ................................................................420

Orientation ........................................................420

Rotate 180 degrees ..........................................420


Orientation (Mac OS 9) ..........................................434


Orientation (Mac OS X) ..........................................431


Orientation (Windows) ............................................429

Manual printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. .....695

Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box

(Mac OS 9) .....................................................153, 542


(Mac OS X) .....................................................152, 515


(Windows) ......................................................151, 486

Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) ............487

Menu Structure .........................................................35

Main Menu ..........................................................35

Main menu during printing ..................................48

Submenus ..........................................................47

Messages regarding ink .........................................701

Messages regarding paper .....................................691

Messages regarding printheads .............................706

Messages regarding printing or adjusment ............704

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge ...708

Multi-sensor error ...................................................710

N

Network Environment .............................................545

Network environment .......................................546

System requirements .......................................545

Network Setting ......................................................545

Network Setting (Macintosh) ..................................572

Network Setting (Windows) ....................................557

No ink tank loaded. .................................................701

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. .......................708

No maintenance cartridge. .....................................708

No Roll Feed Unit. ..........................................700, 710

O

Optional accessories ................................................69

Other Maintenance .................................................648

Other Messages .....................................................709

Other problems .......................................................683

Other useful settings ..............................................419

Output Stacker .......................................................169

Output Stacker Precautions ...................................171

P

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9) ................................523

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) ...............................501

Page Setup Sheet (Windows) ................................454

Paper ......................................................................107

Paper Size ........................................................107

Paper Type .......................................................107

Paper cannot be cut ...............................................683

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box

(Mac OS X) .............................................................498

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box

(Windows) ..............................................................446

Paper is not cut straight ..........................................683

Paper jam. ..............................................................699

Paper loaded askew. ..............................................697

Paper Mismatch .....................................................691

Paper rubs against the Printhead ...........................664

Paper size not detected. .........................................697

Paper Sizes ............................................................ 113

Rolls ................................................................. 114

Sheets .............................................................. 113

Papr Size Mismatch ...............................................692

Papr Type Mismatch ...............................................691

Parts replacement time has passed. ......................709

PHeads: wrong pos. ...............................................706

Prepare for maint cart replacement. .......................708

Prepare for parts replacement. ...............................709

Preparing to Transfer the Printer ............................648

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9) .....520

Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X) ....497

Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows) ......445

Print Area ..................................................................78

Rolls ...................................................................79

Sheets ................................................................78

Print quality and color settings ...............................172

Printed colors are inaccurate ..................................669

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9) .........................517

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) ........................492

Index 715


Index

Printer Driver Settings (Windows) ..........................441

Printer Menu Operations ..........................................29

Printer Modes ...........................................................21

Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel .......25

Mode transition ...................................................22

Modes .................................................................21

Offline, and state of the Control Panel ...............24

Online, and state of the Control Panel ...............23

Submenu mode, and state of the

Control Panel ......................................................25

Printer parts ................................................................8

Printer Specifications ................................................72

Printhead ................................................................622

Printheads ..............................................................622

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9) ...............531

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) ...............507

Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) ................465

Printing at full size ..................................................277

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9) .............................295

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) .............................292

Printing at Full Size (Windows) ..............................290

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes ....330

Printing CAD Drawings ........................................... 411

Printing does not start ............................................656


Color imageRUNNER .............................................247


Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) .........................250

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER. ...............................................251

Registering a hot folder on your computer .......250

Scanning the original and print an enlargement ....................................................251


Color imageRUNNER (Windows) ...................248, 488

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER. ......................................249, 489

Registering a hot folder on your computer ..................................................248, 488

Scanning the original and print an enlargement .............................................249, 489

Printing enlargements or reductions .......................244

Printing from Mac OS 9 ............................................91

Printing from the application software ................92

Selecting the printer ...........................................91

Printing from Mac OS X ............................................89

Printing from the application software ................90

Registering the printer ........................................89

Printing from Photoshop .........................................422

Using the Plug-in to Print ..................................422

Using the Printer Driver to Print ........................422

Printing from Windows .............................................88

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient

Light ........................................................................608

Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing

Environment ...................................................188, 603

By selecting color tones on Charts before printing ......................................................188, 603

Printing in Colors Matching the Measured

Ambient Light ...........................................188, 603

Printing is faint ........................................................663

Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9) ........................359

Printing Large Posters (Windows) ..........................357

Printing Line Drawings and Text

(Mac OS 9) .............................................182, 220, 417

Easy Settings ...................................................182

Print Target .......................................................182

Print targets for line drawings and text .............182


(Mac OS X) .....................................................217, 414


(Windows) ......................................................215, 412


(Windows, Mac OS X) ............................................181

Easy Settings ...................................................181

Print Target .......................................................181

Print targets for line drawings and text .............181

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other .......352

Free Layout (Windows) ....................................352

imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh) ......353

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

(Mac OS X) .............................................................363

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

(Windows) ..............................................................361

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously .....................354

Roll paper (banner) ..........................................354

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................368


(Mac OS X) .............................................................366


(Windows) ..............................................................365

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet ..........................355

Page Layout .....................................................355

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9) ......375

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) ......372

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) ........370

716 Index


Index

Printing Office Documents ......................................183

Easy Settings ...................................................183

Print Target .......................................................183

Print targets for office documents .....................183

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS 9) ..................226

Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X) ..................224

Printing Office Documents (Windows) ....................222

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes ..................331

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver .....................................................331

Specifying custom media sizes for temporary use ....................................................................331

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................338


(Mac OS X) .............................................................336


(Windows) ..............................................................332

Printing by using Custom Media Size ...............334

Printing by using Custom Size .........................332

Printing on Oversized Paper ..................................277

Oversize ...........................................................277

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets .................87

Paper Size ..........................................................87

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ...........87

Rolls and Sheets ................................................87

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls ......................378

Centering originals relative to roll paper width .378

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9) ...385

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) ..382

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) ....380

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets ...................379

Centering originals on sheets ...........................379

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................392


(Mac OS X) .............................................................390


(Windows) ..............................................................388

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) ........179, 233

Easy Settings ...................................................179

Print Target .......................................................179

Print targets for photos and images .................179

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) ...............230

Printing Photos and Images (Windows) .................228

Printing Photos and Images

(Windows, Mac OS X) ............................................177

Easy Settings ...................................................177

Print Target .......................................................177

Print targets for photos and images .................177

Printing Photos in Monochrome .............................189

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9) ..........241

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X) .........238

Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows) ...........236

Printing Posters in Sections ...................................356

Page Layout .....................................................356

Printing procedure ....................................................80


(Large-Format Printing) ..........................................330

Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................330


(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS 9) ........................348

Print the banner ................................................350

Register a Custom Media Size .........................348


(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) ........................345

Print the banner ................................................346

Register a Custom Page Size ..........................345


(Large-Format Printing; Windows) .........................341

Creating the banner in the application ..............342

Printing the banner ...........................................342

Registering a Custom Media Size ....................341

Printing With Watermarks .......................................419

Watermark ........................................................419

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9) ............................................438

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) ..............................................436

Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR) ............707

Problems with the printing quality ...........................663

Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper ..........................................................668

R

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls ..........................134

Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. .................................................................703

Removing Heavyweight Paper from the Front Paper

Feed Slot ................................................................165

Removing Installed Printer Drivers .........................673

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

(Windows) ........................................................673

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

(Windows) ........................................................673

Removing printer drivers (Windows) ................673

Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF

Printmonitor (Macintosh) ..................................673

Removing Rolls from the Roll Feed Unit ................122

Removing Rolls From the Roll Holder .................... 118

Index 717


Index

Removing Sheets from the Top Paper Feed Slot ...164

Removing the Roll Feed Unit .................................147

Replacing Ink Tanks ...............................................614

Compatible Ink Tank .........................................614

Precautions when handling an Ink Tank ...........614

Replacing an Ink Tank ......................................615

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ....................632

Compatible Maintenance Cartridge ..................632

Precautions when handling the Maintenance

Cartridge ...........................................................632

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ..............633

Replacing the Printhead .........................................625

Compatible Printhead .......................................625

Precautions when handling the Printhead ........625

Replacing the Printhead ...................................626

When to replace the Printhead .........................625

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value ......246

Enlarged/Reduced Printing ..............................246

Scaling ..............................................................246


(Mac OS 9) .............................................................257


(Mac OS X) .............................................................254


(Windows) ..............................................................252

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width ..................245


Fit Roll Paper Width .........................................245

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................266


(Mac OS X) .............................................................263


(Windows) ..............................................................261

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size ...........244


Fit Media Size ...................................................244


(Mac OS 9) .............................................................274


(Mac OS X) .............................................................271


(Windows) ..............................................................269

Responding to Error Messages ..............................687

Error messages (if action can be taken) ...........687

Error messages (if no action can be taken) ......687

Other Messages ...............................................688

Warning messages ...........................................687

Responding to Messages .......................................687

Roll feed unit err .............................................700, 710

Roll Holder Set .................................................70, 143

Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed

Slot .........................................................................684

Roll Paper Unit Cover (Inside) ..................................12

Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. .....694

Roll printing is selected. .........................................694

Roller marks are left across the trailing edge of paper ..............................................................671, 684

S

Selecting the Paper Size (Sheet) ...........................163

Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) ..............................124

Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) ...........................162

Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source .................. 115

Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source ..............154

Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows) ...........447

Sharing the Printer in Windows ..............................568

Sheet printing is selected. ......................................694

Software .................................................................441

Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) ................543

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) .................490

Specifications ...........................................................72

Ink .......................................................................74

Interface .............................................................73

Paper ..................................................................75

Printer .................................................................72

Printing performance ..........................................73

Specifying NetWare Print Services .........................561

Choosing the type of print services ..................561

Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server .......................................................562

Specifying NetWare Protocols ................................564

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver ....................655

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9) ...97

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) ..95

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) ....93

Specifying Printer-Related Information ...................554

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls .................129

Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing) .........130

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit ) ......................................131

Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specified position) .............................................133

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls .................135

Mac OS 9 .........................................................137

Mac OS X .........................................................136

Windows ...........................................................135

Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) .........................125

718 Index


Index

Specifying the Printer's Frame Type .......................559

Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF

Device Setup Utility ..........................................559

Specifying the frame type using the printer

Control Panel ....................................................560

Stand ........................................................................69

Status Print ...............................................................62

Checking the information in the Status Print report .................................................................62

Printing Status Print Reports ..............................62

Submenu Display .....................................................61

Information of the loaded paper .........................61

Printer information ..............................................61

Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels .............................................................61

Support Pane (Mac OS X) ......................................506

Support Sheet (Windows) ......................................461

Switching Modes ......................................................26

Switching the Printer Online/Offline ....................26

Switching to Menu Mode ....................................28

T

The back side of the paper is dirty .........................666

The contrast becomes uneven during printing .......667

The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up ....................................................................656

The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink ...................................................................656

The edges of the paper are dirty ............................665

The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed

Correctly .................................................................672

The length of printed images is inaccurate .............668

The printer consumes a lot of ink ...........................683

The printer does not go on .....................................684

The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent ..................................................................656

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper ...............662

The printer stops during a print job .........................662

The roll is empty. ....................................................700

The surface of the paper is dirty .............................666

This paper cannot be used. ....................................692

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet ........................352

Top Cover (Inside) ....................................................10

Top cover is open. ..................................................709

Tray Feed Area ......................................................... 11

Troubleshooting ......................................................653

Turning the Printer On and Off .................................19

Turning the printer off .........................................20

Turning the printer on .........................................19

Types of Paper .......................................................108

Updating paper information .............................. 111

Viewing the Paper Reference Guide ................108

U

Unknown file. ..........................................................709

Updating the Firmware ...........................................652

Confirming the firmware version .......................652

Updating the firmware ......................................652

Use another paper. .................................................704

Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors ................600

Using Favorites ......................................................421

Favorites ...........................................................421

Using Favorites (Mac OS 9) ...................................529

Printing using the favorite .................................529

Registering a favorite .......................................529

Using Favorites (Mac OS X) ...................................506

Using Favorites (Windows) ....................................448

Printing using the favorite .................................449

Registering a favorite .......................................448

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals ...............423

Edit Using PosterArtist .....................................423

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

(Windows) ..............................................................463

Using RemoteUI .....................................................555

Using the Output Stacker .......................................169

Utility Pane (Mac OS X) .........................................503

Utility Sheet (Windows) ..........................................460

V

Vents ........................................................................18

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application

(Mac OS 9) .............................................................544


(Mac OS X) .............................................................516


(Windows) ..............................................................491

Viewing Videos of Explanations .................................3

W

When to Replace Ink Tanks ....................................621

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink .........................................................621

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the

Display Screen .................................................621

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the

Display Screen .................................................621

Index 719


Index

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ........638

If a message for checking the Maintenance

Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen .......638

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen ..638

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted ..........................................638

White dots about 1 mm (0.039 in) apart appear on printed documents, in the direction paper is fed. ....670

Windows .................................................................441

Wrong paper feed slot for this paper type. .............695

X x printhead error (x is Left or Right) ........................707

x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right) ......706

720 Index




©CANON INC. 2007